Yamaha HTR-6068 de handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
English
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front panel (TSR-7790) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front panel (HTR-6068) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rear panel (TSR-7790) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Rear panel (HTR-6068) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PREPARATIONS 16
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 32
Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting an external power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 36
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (TSR-7790 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
PLAYBACK 53
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
En 3
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CONFIGURATIONS 95
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) . . . 99
DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 119
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 121
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
En 4
APPENDIX 125
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.
YPAO microphone
CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide
Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the TSR-7790 (U.S.A.
model), unless otherwise specified.
• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
(TSR-7790) (HTR-6068)
30° 30°
En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
AV receiver (the unit)
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.140
Change the input source
and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)
. p.54
Supports 2- to 7.1-channel (plus presence)
speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite
acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.36
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
. p.56
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.60
• Playing back music in multiple rooms
(multi-zone)
. p.82
iPod/iPhone/
Bluetooth device
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Wide variety of supported content
•Bluetooth
. p.66
• iPod/iPhone
. p.67
•USB
. p.70
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.73
• Internet radio
. p.77
•AirPlay
. p.80
4K Ultra HD signals and
HDCP 2.2 supported
Control
En 7
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.27)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.25)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
❑
Various wireless connection methods (
p.44
)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
without router.
❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.56)
Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a
natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room
(CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers
are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the
unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to
the rear sound field even when no surround back
speakers are connected.
❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed
in front (p.58)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to
place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in
the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5
speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).
❑ Low power consumption (p.118)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption.
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Wi-Fi or
Wireless Direct
VSBS
Useful tips
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not
match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack(s) of your external device (
p.28
).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.108).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.112).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to get more bass sounds…
Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy
enhanced bass sounds (p.94).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.35).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to
update the unit’s firmware (p.123). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.124).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.95)
• SCENE settings (p.98)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings
(p.100)
• Various function settings (p.103)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.119)
• System settings (p.121)
En 8
Useful applications
■ AV CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into
a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
commands and playback source.
Functions
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Playback control (including music selection for some
sources)
• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)
“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you
with cable connections between AV receiver and source
devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application
guides you through the various settings such as
speaker connections, TV and video/audio device
connections and selecting the speaker system.
Functions
• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio
devices)
• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup
assistance with illustrations)
• Viewing owner’s manual
• For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or
Google Play.
En 9
Front panel (TSR-7790)
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.111)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.112)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.113)
• An iPod is being charged (p.67)
3 ZONE 2 key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85).
4 ZONE CONTROL key
Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled
by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.85).
5 INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.47).
6 MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62).
7 PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.87).
8 FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.61).
9 Front display
Displays information (p.11).
0 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
A TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.61).
B PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60).
C INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
D PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
E YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36).
F TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.93).
G SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.54).
H PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55).
I STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59).
J VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.30).
K USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod
(p.67).
L VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INFO (WPS)ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
INPUT
SCENE
MAIN ZONE
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
(CONNECT)
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
HDMI IN
5V 1A
VIDEO
VOLU ME
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
:9 B2 34561 78 A
C
LF
EDHIJ KG
En 10
Front panel (HTR-6068)
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.111)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.112)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.113)
• An iPod is being charged (p.67)
3 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36).
4 ZONE 2 key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85).
5 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
6 ZONE CONTROL key
Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled
by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.85).
7 INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.47).
8 MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62).
9 PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.87).
0 FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.61).
A Front display
Displays information (p.11).
B TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.61).
C PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60).
D PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
E INPUT keys
Select an input source.
F TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.93).
G SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.54).
H PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55).
I STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59).
J VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.30).
K USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod
(p.67).
L VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
INFO (WPS)ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
SCENE
MAIN ZONE
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
VIDEO
VOLUME
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
INPUT
HDMI IN
5V 1A
(CONNECT)
5A C3 46781 2 9:
D
L
FHIJ KEG
B
En 11
Front display (indicators)
1 ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.118).
2 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT1/OUT2 (TSR-7790 only)
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal
OUT (HTR-6068 only)
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
3 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60) is
working.
4 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56) is
working.
5 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
6 Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.44).
7 Bluetooth indicator
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a
Bluetooth
device
(p.66).
8 PA RT Y
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.86).
9 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
0 ZONE2
Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.85).
A MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
B Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
C VIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.56), or the virtual
surround processing (p.58) is working.
D Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
E Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.91).
F ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.93) is working.
G Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
B Presence speaker (L)
N Presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
L C R
FPRFPL
SL
SBL SBRSB
SW
SR
VOL.
MUTE
ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL
ENHANCER
TUNEDSTEREO
2
SLEEP
PARTY
ZONE
OUT 1
2
2 C34 87 9 A1 :6B5
D DE
F G
En 12
Rear panel (TSR-7790)
1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.84).
2 TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function
(p.33).
3 HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting
video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
4 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.31).
5 HDMI 1–5 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.27).
6 Wireless antenna
For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44).
7 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.32).
8 SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.21).
9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.34).
0 Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.34).
A PHONO jacks
(Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
For connecting to a turntable (p.30).
B AUDIO 1–2 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.30).
C AV 1–6 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.27).
D ZONE2 OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.83).
E MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.25).
VIDEO jack
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.26).
F PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or to an
external power amplifier (p.33).
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
PB
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
PB
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACK SURROUND
PRE OUT
CENTER FRONT
SINGLE
ZONE 2
NETWORK
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
COMPONENT VIDEO
1
2
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
WIRELESS
HDCP2.2
2
B F
8
D
51 3 7
A
9 0
C
6
4
E
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
En 13
Rear panel (HTR-6068)
1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.84).
2 TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function
(p.33).
3 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
4 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.31).
5 HDMI 1–5 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.27).
6 Wireless antenna
For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44).
7 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.32).
8 SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.21).
9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.34).
0 Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.34).
A AUDIO 1–2 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.30).
B AV 1–6 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.27).
C ZONE2 OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.83).
D MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.25).
VIDEO jack
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.26).
E SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.33).
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
ZONE 2
NETWORK
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
1
2
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
WIRELESS
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
HDCP2.2
2
EA
8
C
51 3 7
9 :
B
4 6
D
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to prevent
improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
En 14
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 z (receiver power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
HDMI 1–5 HDMI 1–5 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel)
AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select
“AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”)
TUNER FM/AM radio
BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth
connection
(the unit as a
Bluetooth
receiver)
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select
a desired network source)
4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.85).
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.54).
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.55).
7 External device operation keys
Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback
device (p.140).
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.69).
A Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.61).
BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is
selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.140).
B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.55).
C INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91).
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.62).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
6 87
123 4
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
123 4
12
AUDIO
TUNER
3 4
SUR. DECODE
G
I
F
J
K
1
3
2
5
4
6
H
7
E
D
8
A
B
:
C
9
(TSR-7790 U.S.A. model)
En 15
F HDMI OUT key
(TSR-7790)
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.53).
(HTR-6068)
Enables/disables video/audio output from the HDMI OUT
jack (p.53).
G PA RT Y k ey
Turns on/off the party mode (p.86).
H VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
I MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
J OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.92).
K DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.91).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
6 87
123 4
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
123 4
12
AUDIO
TUNER
3 4
SUR. DECODE
G
I
F
J
K
1
3
2
5
4
6
H
7
E
D
8
A
B
:
C
9
(TSR-7790 U.S.A. model)
En 16
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.17)
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.
2 Connecting speakers (p.21)
Connect the speakers to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.25)
Connect a TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.27)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.31)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6
Connecting a network cable or preparing
the wireless antenna (p.32)
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for
establishing a wireless network connection.
7 Connecting other devices (p.33)
Connect external devices, such as an external power amplifier (TSR-7790 only) and a device compatible
with the trigger function.
8 Connecting the power cable (p.34)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.35)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
10
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.36)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
11
Connecting to a network device wirelessly
(p.44)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless
connection.
En 17
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the
representative speaker layout examples.
If you use five speakers in the front side, use two of them as front surround speakers (*1) or presence speakers (*2). We recommend using them as front surround speakers for
enjoying unprocessed playback (p.59) or presence speakers for enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (p.56).
• For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.134).
• If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers.
To reinforce the rear left/right sounds, use them as surround back speakers.
To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers.
• Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds.
1 Placing speakers
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.20).
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Speaker system (the number of channels)
7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1
Front
5.1
4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) 1
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
● ●●●● ● ●●●
Front (R) 2 ● ●●●● ● ●●●
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●●●●● ●
Surround (L) 4
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel
sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
●●●●●
*
1
●
Surround (R) 5 ●●●●●
*
1
●
Surround back (L) 6
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
●●
Surround back (R) 7 ●●
Surround back 8 Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. ●
Presence (L) E
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56), the presence speakers
create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room.
●●
*
2
Presence (R) R ●●
*
2
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
● ●●●● ● ●●●
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 18
7.1+2-channel system
• The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.56).
7.1-channel system (using presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This
system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
6.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker.
45
1
2
39
67
ER
9
45
1
2
39
ER
45
1
2
39
67
45
1
2
39
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 19
5.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to
the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for
7.1-channel contents.
Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)
Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual
surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (
p.106
) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.
• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
Front 5.1-channel system (using presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
4.1-channel system
45
12
39
45
12
39
1
2
39
ER
45
12
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 20
2.1-channel system
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a
6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case,
you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 MIN”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
12
9
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
SPIMP.8MIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 21
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1+2-,
7.1-, and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other
systems, connect speakers while referring to the
connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system.
Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system
(using surround back speakers)
2 Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.
• The illustrations of the unit (rear) used in this section are of the
TSR-7790.
–
+
–
+
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
1
2
1
67
2
3
45
9
9
ER
The unit (rear)
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
1
2
1
67
2
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 22
7.1-channel system
(using presence speakers)
6.1-channel system
■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A. and Australia models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
1
2
12
3
45
9
ER
The unit (rear)
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
1
2
12
3
45
9
8
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it
to the SINGLE jack (L side).
The unit (rear)
FRONT
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 23
Push-type speaker terminals
(HTR-6068 only)
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Press down the tab.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the
terminal.
d Release the tab.
■ Connecting the subwoofer
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.105) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks output the
same signals.
Z
ONE 2/F.PRESENCE
EX
TRA SP
aa
b
c
d
+ (red)
- (black)
CENTER
FRONT
Audio pin cable
12
3
45
9
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
1
2
The unit (rear)
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not
making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
• Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp
connections.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 24
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
■ Video jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B),
and chrominance red (P
R). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
Input/output jacks and cables
HDCP2.2
(BD/DVD)
HDMI cable
MONITOR OUT
Component video cable
MONITOR OUT
Video pin cable
OPTICAL
Digital optical cable
COAXIAL
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
En 25
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.
■ HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• (TSR-7790 only)
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.26).
• You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.140).
■ Component/composite video connection
When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
3 Connecting a TV
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
CO
M
V
MONIT
O
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
H
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
H
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUR. B
A
SIN
G
ZONE 2
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
OPTICAL
O
O
HDMI
HDMI
HDCP2.2
21
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
H
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUR. BACK SURROUND
PR
C
SINGLE
ZONE 2
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
P
R
PB
Y
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
O
O
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video input
(component video)
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 26
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
(TSR-7790 only)
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.53).
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
H
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUR. BACK SURROUND
P
R
C
SINGLE
ZONE 2
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
VIDEO
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
O
O
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
V
V
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
Video input
(composite video)
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
CO
M
V
MONIT
O
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
H
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
H
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUR. B
A
SIN
G
ZONE 2
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
HDMI
HDMI
21
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDCP2.2
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI input
Projector
TV (already connected)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 27
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
– Connecting an iPod (p.67)
– Connecting a USB storage device (p.70)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.28).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–5, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.25).
• If your video device supports HDCP 2.2, connect the device to the HDMI 1–3 jacks.
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on
the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• The component video signals (other than 480i/576i signals) input to AV 1–2 jacks of the unit can be output
from the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks only. To watch those videos, you need to connect
your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.25). For details, refer to “Video
signal flow” (p.139).
4 Connecting playback devices
O 1
AUDI O 2
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE
SPEAKERS
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACK SURROUND
PRE OUT
CENTER FRONT
SINGLE
ZONE 2
T VIDEO
1
2
(
RADIO
)
WIRELESS
HDMI
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI 1–5 jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
CO
M
V
MONIT
O
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
H
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
H
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUR. B
A
SIN
G
ZONE 2
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
AV2
AV 1
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
O
O
C
C
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit
(rear)
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital optical or digital coaxial)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 28
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack
(p.25) or to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.26) of the unit. For details, refer to “Video signal flow”
(p.139).
■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
❑ Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HD
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HD
C
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
A
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
Z
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 3–6 (VIDEO)
jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack,
AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–5
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–5 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–5
AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
Component video Analog stereo
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT
VIDEO)
AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE
O
ZONE
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
AV 5
R
L
AUDIO
AV2
P
B
Y
P
R
L
R
L
R
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 29
• The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2
Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input
source.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be
used) and press the cursor key (q).
6
Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used).
8
Press ON SCREEN.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back
on the video device will be output from the unit.
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLA
Y
RETURN
OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
AV
5
65
V-AUX
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
N
BLUETOOT
H
US
B
AV
5
6
5
V-AUX
1
AUDIO
TUNER
3
4
ON SCREEN
ENTER
AV 2
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 30
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
* TSR-7790 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6 or AUDIO, the audio played back on
the audio device will be output from the unit.
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.67) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.70).
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
❑ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT
jack of the unit (p.25).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that match the output jacks on your device.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital optical
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUR. BACK SURROUND
PRE OU
CENTER
SINGLE
ZONE 2
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
C
L
R
L
R
O
O
C
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 jacks
The unit
(rear)
Audio device
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
(CONNECT)
STRAIGHT
HDMI IN
5V 1A
VIDEO
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
HDMI
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 31
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SPEAKERS
VIDEO
NETWORK
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
WIRELESS
AM antennaFM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 32
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Connecting the network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set
“Network Connection” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.112).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.120) in the “Information” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Preparing the wireless antenna
If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up
straight.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see
“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.44).
• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGECLASSE2
SPEAKERS
NETWORK
(
NET
)
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
WIRELESS
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)
WIRELESS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 33
Connecting an external power amplifier
(TSR-7790 only)
When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker
output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
1 SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
2 SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
3 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
4 FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
5 SUBWOOFER1–2 jacks
For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same
sound is output from them.
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack with a
monaural mini-jack cable.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu.
7 Connecting other devices
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
– When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other
devices (except the unit) to the amplifier.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
M
I 1
D
VD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI 5
P
2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
ANTENNA
F
M
AM
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACK SURROUND
PRE OUT
CENTER FRONT
SINGLE
ZONE 2
NETWORK
(
NET
)
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
1
2
(
RADIO
)
WIRELESS
1 2 3 4 5
The unit (rear)
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
M
O
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
TRIGGER OUT
12V
0.1A
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT jack
System
connector
jack
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 34
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
8 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
NT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
220V
-
240V
110V
-
120V
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
CENTER
WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
NETWORK
(
NET
)
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 35
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and
Chinese.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
6
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
z
Cursor keys
En 36
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not
become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
• If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp
Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before
starting YPAO.
• If you want to use the surround speakers for the front 5.1-channel system
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.19), set “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the
“Setup” menu to “Front”.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the
front panel.
• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
YPAO MIC
9
12
3
45
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
YPAO MIC
jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
RETURN
ENTER
z
En 37
(HTR-6068)
The following screen appears on the TV.
This completes the preparations.
See “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)”
(p.38) to start the measurement.
(TSR-7790)
The following screen appears on the TV.
Proceed to Step 5.
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
• To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and
select “Manual Setup” (p.105).
5
(TSR-7790 only) If desired, change the measuring
method (multi/single).
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Settings
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be
optimized to suit the area defined by those positions
(multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 38
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)
(TSR-7790 only)” (p.39)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.38)
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
Follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about
3 minutes to perform the measurement.
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.42) or “Warning messages” (p.43).
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.41).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
a b
a
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
de
bac
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions + front/back)
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)
Single measure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 39
3
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.93) in the
“Option” menu.
5
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure) (TSR-7790 only)
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening
positions.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.42) or “Warning messages” (p.43).
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 40
3
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.41).
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
5
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.93) in the
“Option” menu.
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 41
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed) * TSR-7790 only
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
3
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.102).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
1
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 42
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 43
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1: Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.41) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2: Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.41) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80
ft) of the listening position.
W-3: Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as
possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 44
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.45).
• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection
(p.32) or Wireless Direct (p.51).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the
unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.51).
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.32) or the
wireless network connection (p.45).
• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Internet radio
–Network services
– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
The unit
Wireless router
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
The unitMobile device
(such as iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 45
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
Yes
Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPod touch)?
Yes
A (p.45)
B (p.47)
Does your wireless router
(access point) have a WPS
button?
C (p.48)
No
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 46
9
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
* This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless
router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly
If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform
the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The
following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)
1
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay
speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.
2
Check the network currently selected and tap
“Next”.
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically
connected to the selected network (access point).
Wireless (WAC*)
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS
device to the unit using a wireless connection. For
details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting
wirelessly”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)
USB Cable
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS
device to the unit using a USB cable. For details,
see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB
cable”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)
The name of the unit
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 47
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable
If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the
procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.
1
Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and
press ENTER.
3
Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ B: Using the WPS push button
configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3
seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
HDMI IN
5V 1A
VIDEO
AUX
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 48
■ C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push
button configuration method, follow the procedure below to
configure the wireless network settings.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the
WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow
the instructions displayed on the TV screen.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.45).
Access Point
Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by
searching for an access point. For details on
settings, see “Searching for an access point”
(p.49).
Manual Setting
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.49).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point). The method is available if the
wireless router (access point) supports the WPS
PIN code method. For details on settings, see
“Using the PIN code” (p.50).
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 49
❑ Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point and select “NEXT”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select
“NEXT”.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 50
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character
string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
❑ Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
2
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 51
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 52
9
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 10.
Otherwise, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64
hexadecimal digits.
10
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.
The SSID and security key information is required for setup
of a mobile device.
11
Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.
12
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 53
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66)
• Playing back iPod music (p.67)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.70)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.73)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.77)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE
CONTROL on the front panel (p.93).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
(TSR-7790 only)
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.54).
• When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
Basic playback procedure
HDMI OUT 1+2
(TSR-7790 only)
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
HDMI OUT 1
Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 (TSR-7790)
or HDMI OUT (HTR-6068) jack.
HDMI OUT 2
(TSR-7790 only)
Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
HDMI OUT 1
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
PARTY
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
VOLUME
MUTE
HDMI OUT
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
En 54
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI
output jack (TSR-7790 only) with just one touch.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
Configuring scene assignments
1
Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
• Select an input source (p.53)
• Select a sound program (p.55)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60)
• (TSR-7790 only)
Selecting an HDMI output jack (p.53)
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
• You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.97).
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.98) in the “Scene” menu.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE
Input HDMI 1 AV 4 NET RADIO TUNER
Sound
program
MOVIE
(Sci-Fi)
STRAIGHT
MUSIC
(7ch Stereo)
MUSIC
(7ch Stereo)
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
Off On On On
HDMI output
jack
(TSR-7790 only)
HDMI OUT
1+2
HDMI OUT
1+2
HDMI OUT
1+2
HDMI OUT
1+2
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
SET Complete
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
SCENE
En 55
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.56).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.57).
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.59).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.59).
❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.60).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.60).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “DSP Program” menu (p.99).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the
straight decode mode (p.59) is automatically selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.11) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.119).
Selecting the sound mode
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
INF
O
S
LEE
P
NE
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1 2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
PROGRAM
Cursor keys
En 56
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound
fields. However, even when no presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence
Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,
the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of
depth to the rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
❑ MOVIE THEATER
L C R
SL SW SR
VOL.
Hall in Vienna
FPRFPL
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
En 57
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
❑ LIVE/CLUB
❑ STEREO
• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.58) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is
selected.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
En 58
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround
technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using
presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front (p.19) and enjoy multichannel surround sound
using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates
the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel
surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
En 59
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual
CINEMA FRONT (p.58) works when multichannel source is played back.
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system
and the selected decode type (p.100).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.135).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
STRAIGHT
bPLIIx Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back
speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back
speakers.
L C R
SL SW SR
VOL.
†‡PLƒx MOVIE
SBL SBR
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
H
DM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
AU
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
STRAIGHT
SUR.DECODE
En 60
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.94) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
PURE DIRECT
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
Enhancer On
ENHANCER
“ENHANCER” lights up
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
NE
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1 2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
PURE DIRECT
ENHANCER
En 61
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
3
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
Listening to FM/AM radio
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
TUFM50/AM9
VOL.
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
P
RE
S
ET
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
TUNING
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 62
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.65).
■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.61)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65).
VOL.
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
Preset number
VOL.
02:Empty
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
VOL.
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 63
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.65).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
Item name
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SBL SBR
Information
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
CLASSICS
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SBL SBR
Traffic information station (frequency)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TP FM101.30MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SBL SBR
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
INFO
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 64
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.63), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
1
2
3
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 65
■ Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 66
You can play back music files stored on a
Bluetooth
device (such
as smartphones) on the unit.
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file
formats” (p.137).
Playing back
Bluetooth
device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a
Bluetooth
connection
between a
Bluetooth
device (such as smartphones) and the unit,
and play back music stored the
Bluetooth
device on the unit.
• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
1
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the
input source.
2
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network
name of the unit) from the available device list.
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will
be made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
3
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start
playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song
title) is displayed on the TV.
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit
automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish
another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth
connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following
operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
Playing back music via Bluetooth
The unit
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
NE
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
BLUETOOTH
External device
operation keys
En 67
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.137).
• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on
the unit, use AirPlay (p.80).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.69).
Playing back iPod music
(CONNECT)
STRAIGHT
HDMI IN
5V 1A
VIDEO
AUX
The unit (front)
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
Connected
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Cursor keys
En 68
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
External device
operation keys
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 69
■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself to start playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
MODE
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 70
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.137).
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
RADIO
(CONNECT)
STRAIGHT
HDMI IN
5V 1A
VIDEO
AUX
The unit (front)
USB storage device
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
Connected
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
En 71
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87).
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 72
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 73
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.32). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.120) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.137).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
❑ For Windows Media Player 12
1
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
❑ For Windows Media Player 11
1
Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
2
Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
3
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.
4
Click “OK” to exit.
• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 74
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 75
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.97).
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 76
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 77
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.32). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.120) in the “Information” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
Playback of Internet radio
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87).
Listening to Internet radio
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 78
■ Browse screen
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
Bookmark On
(Bookmark Off)
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from
the “Bookmarks” folder (p.79).
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Bookmark On
Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder
(p.79).
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 79
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,
you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the
browse screen.
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
1
Select the desired Internet radio station in the
browse screen or start playback of it to display the
playback screen.
2
Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”
and press ENTER.
The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the
“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.
■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website
1
Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.
2
Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.120) in the
“Information” menu.
3
Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.
4
Register your favorite radio stations.
Click the “Add” icon (
❤
+) next to the station name.
• To unregister a station, select “My Favorites” in the Home screen, and then
click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name.
You can switch the language.
Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 80
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.120) in the “Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.137).
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay password (p.90).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
Playing back music with AirPlay
PC
iTunes
iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch
Router
(wired or wireless)
The unit
(wired or wireless)
iTunes (example) iPod iOS6 (example)iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
En 81
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.97) in the “Input” menu
to “Off”.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
Menu Function
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 82
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main zone), another person
can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and Bluetooth, USB, and network sources can be output to
Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the
AUDIO jacks (AV 5–6 or AUDIO 1–2 jacks) of the unit. The party mode (p.86) allows you to play back the
same audio output in Main zone as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type.
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The connection method varies
depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
Living room (Main zone)
Study room (Zone2)
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
En 83
■ Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105)
in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.85), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
■ Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a
stereo pin cable.
SURROUND CENTER
CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2
FRONT
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
12
3
45
76
9
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
PTICAL
PTICAL
OAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
SUR. BACK SU
SINGLE
ZONE 2
T
UT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
L
R
AUDIO
L
R
12
3
45
76
9
QW
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
The unit (rear)
ZONE2 OUT jacks
Zone2
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
En 84
■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)
You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control
supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that
support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals
by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
M
O
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
REMOTE
IN
OUT
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Infrared signal
transmitter
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
(supplied with each device)
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2
Main zone
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2
En 85
Controlling Zone2
1
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2
Press z (receiver power).
Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or
disabled.
When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the
front display.
3
Use the following keys to select an input source.
AV 5–6: AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks
AUDIO: AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select
“AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”)
TUNER: FM/AM radio
BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection (the unit as a
Bluetooth receiver)
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is
selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches
to “SERVER”.
4
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66)
• Playing back iPod music (p.67)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.70)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.73)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.77)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
or web control (p.88) to control Zone2.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP
repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of
time.
• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the
unit’s internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume
control on it.
• The Zone 2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source
selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone 2
input with the web control (p.88) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2
input or use the party mode (p.86).
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
M
USI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
AV 5–6
AUDIO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
MAIN/ZONE2
z
En 86
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
1
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.115) in
the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
PARTY
En 87
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut
numbers.
• You can also use the “Bookmark” feature to register Internet radio stations.
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.
■ Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
1
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
2
Press MEMORY.
• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use
numeric keys to select the shortcut number after step 2.
3
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
■ Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
1
Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB.
2
Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number
(01 to 40).
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a
shortcut.
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected
to this unit.
– A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to
the network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of
service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A BLUETOOTH connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this
unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you
have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not
recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
Useful functions
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
01:Empty
Shortcut number (flashes)
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
02:Empty
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
01:USB
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
MO
D
E
SCEN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
A
V
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
AUDI
O
TUNE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
MEMORY
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Numeric keys
En 88
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these
cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby
mode, set “Network Standby” (p.90) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x
– Safari 7.x
1
Start the web browser.
2
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.120) in the “Information” menu.
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.90) to access the
web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of
the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.
• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.113), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC
to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,
refer to its instruction manual.
• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.
– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the
screen.
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8).
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
Web browser
Web control
PC
Router The unit
Web control
(wired or wireless) (wired or wireless)
En 89
■ Top menu screen
1 CONTROL
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
2 STATUS
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.
3 SETTINGS
Moves to the settings screen.
4 PA RT Y M ODE
Turns on/off the party mode (p.86).
5 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
6 MAIN VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
7 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
■ Control screen
1 PLAY INFO
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
2 TOP MENU
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 SCENE
Selects a scene for the selected zone.
4 POWER
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
5 VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
6 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
2
1
4
3
5
6
En 90
■ Settings screen
1 Rename
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.114) or the name of each zone
(p.115). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Network
Selects the network connection method (p.112) or configures the network parameters (such as
IP address) (p.112). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.80). Click “APPLY” to apply the
changes to the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.113) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control
screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.113).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
2 BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
2
1
3
Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network
devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and
other external devices.
• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
En 91
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Viewing the current status
Input source group Item
HDMI 1–5
V-AUX
AV 1–6
AUDIO 1–2
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
TUNER
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (
p.63
).
L C R
SL SW SR
VOL.
Audio Decoder
SBL SBR
Item name
L C R
SL SW SR
VOL.
†‡PLƒx MOVIE
SBL SBR
Information
Bluetooth
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Input source group Item
Input source/
Party mode
status
Audio format/
Decoder
Compressed Music Enhancer status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound
mode
Volume/
YPAO
Volume
status
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
INFO
DISPLAY
En 92
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
Tone Control
Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
93
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 93
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
93
Dialogue
(Dialog)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 93
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 93
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 94
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. 94
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 94
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
94
Input Settings
(Input Settings)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 94
Video Out
(V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input
source.
94
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
94
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information station.
63
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.69),
USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76).
—
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.69),
USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76).
—
En 93
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass
(Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and
low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that
you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.
Settings
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already
saved (p.36).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night.
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard
clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0
to 3
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing
this setting.
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence
speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.56) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is
enabled.
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
En 94
Setting range
0
to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.
Settings
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60).
Settings
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Processing” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
■ Input Settings (Input Settings)
Configures the input settings.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.
On (On) Enables Extra Bass.
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Ideal position
Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing.
Processing (Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Video Out (V.Out)
Off (Off) Does not output video.
HDMI 1–5 (HDMI1–5),
AV 1–6 (AV1–6),
V-AUX (V-AUX)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Stereo
(Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
En 95
CONFIGURATIONS
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 96
Audio In
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an
audio jack of others.
96
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 96
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
97
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
97
En 96
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2, USB
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Audio In
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For
example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–2
■ Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV1” or “AV4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV2” or “AV3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the unit’s
corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–4
Settings
Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
En 97
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.54) using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 98
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder,
Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack [TSR-7790 only]) in the
selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.54).
■ Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected
to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set
“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.140).
Displays the assignments of the selected scene.
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 98
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the
scene assignments.
98
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 99
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 99
Device Control
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
Detail
Input Input source to be used
HDMI Output
(TSR-7790 only)
HDMI OUT jack to be used
Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used
Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off
En 99
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.54) for the selected scene.
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (DSP Program menu)
En 100
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
DSP Program menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Settings for sound programs
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII
Movie), bPLIIx Music*
(bPLII Music*), bPLIIx
Game* (bPLII Game*),
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
1ms to 49ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
En 101
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”.
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Sound program
Item Function Settings
2ch Stereo Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto
, Off
7ch Stereo
Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0
to +5
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.
0 to 5
to 10
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off
, On
Item Function Settings
Decode Type Item Function Settings
bPLIIx Music
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off
, On
Select “On” to wrap front left/right
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 3
to 7
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to 0
to +3
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 0.3
to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
En 102
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 103
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 36
Manual Setup
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 105
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 105
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 105
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 105
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 106
Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 106
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 106
Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. 106
Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 106
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 107
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 107
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 107
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 108
Sound
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 108
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 108
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 109
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 109
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 109
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 109
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 109
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 109
Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 109
Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 110
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 111
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 112
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 112
En 104
Network
Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 112
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 112
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 113
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 113
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 114
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Enables/disables the
Bluetooth
functions. 114
Audio Receive Disconnect Terminates the
Bluetooth
connection between the
Bluetooth
device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 66
Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from
Bluetooth
devices (
Bluetooth
standby). 114
Multi Zone
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 115
Zone2 Set
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 115
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 115
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 115
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 115
Function
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 116
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 116
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 116
Trigger Output
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 116
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 117
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 117
ECO
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 117
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 118
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 118
Menu Item Function Page
En 105
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations
are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection.
Settings
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Basic
Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).
7ch +1ZONE
Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.83) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone.
5ch BI-AMP
Select this option when you connect front speakers that support
bi-amp connections (p.23).
Front
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Center
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Surround
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
En 106
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• This setting is not available in the following cases:
–“Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP”
–“Surround” is set to “None”
–“Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”
Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP” or “7ch +1ZONE”.
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Settings
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Choices
Surround
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a
speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified
value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz
, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Surround Back
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Small x2
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Front Presence
Use Select this option when presence speakers are connected.
None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected.
Subwoofer
Use
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not
reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front
speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Layout
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side
of the room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front
side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.58) works in this case.
Bass Cross Over
En 107
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m
to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.36). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.36) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
En 108
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2
Settings
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on
the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
Off Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Delay Enable
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto/Manual Select
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
En 109
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms
to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume
is adjusted.
Settings
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Settings
• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
Adjustment
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max
Volume”.)
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically.
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
En 110
Video
Configures the video output settings.
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.122) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be
displayed on your TV normally.)
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,
1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.
Direct Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
Resolution
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
Aspect
Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
En 111
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.140).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.140) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2
Default
AV 4
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Enables/disables ARC (p.141) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby
Sync”.
TV Audio Input
ARC
Off Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Standby Sync
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
En 112
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting (except for “HDMI OUT2” [TSR-7790 only]) is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to
“Off”.
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input
selection keys (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in
standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Network
Configures the network settings.
■ Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
Amp
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On
Enables the audio output from the speakers.
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 (TSR-7790 only)
HDMI OUT (TV) (HTR-6068 only)
Off Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is
set to the power saving mode.
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with
a commercially-available network cable (p.32)
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.45).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the
unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device
to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.51).
DHCP
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
En 113
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
• AirPlay (p.80) and DMC (p.97) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address
6–10” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
Filter
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
MAC Address 1–10
En 114
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Bluetooth
Configures the
Bluetooth
settings.
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the
Bluetooth
function (p.66).
Settings
■ Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from
Bluetooth
devices (
Bluetooth
standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns
on when a connect operation is performed on the
Bluetooth
device.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.113) is set to “Off”.
Off Disables the
Bluetooth
function.
On
Enables the
Bluetooth
function.
Off Disables the
Bluetooth
standby function.
On
Enables the
Bluetooth
standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
En 115
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.115).
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.86).
Choice
Target: Zone 2
Settings
Zone Rename
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
Zone Rename
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
En 116
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0
(higher to brighten)
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.118) is set to “On”.
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is
operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
■ Trigger Output
Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or
input switching.
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,
switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function
of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Dimmer (Front Display)
Short Message
On Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Wallpaper
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Trigger Mode
Power
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone.”
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone.”
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual.”
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
En 117
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if
no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into
standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
Target Zone
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 Minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit
and no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
En 118
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Off Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
English English
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
En 119
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Types of information
■ Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
• (TSR-7790 only)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
En 120
■ Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
(When using Wireless Direct)
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.124).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
vTuner ID vTuner ID
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network)
Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
SSID The SSID of the wireless network
Security Security method
Security Key Security key
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address
Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.121)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.122)
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.121)
Tuner Freq. Step
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.122)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2
Volume The volume setting for Zone2
En 121
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z
.
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press MAIN ZONE
z
to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
• Default settings are underlined.
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1
, ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for
3 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for
3 seconds.
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Item Function Page
SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 121
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 121
TU
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
122
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 122
MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 122
4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. 123
INIT Restores the default settings. 123
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 123
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 123
6 MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8
MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
Item Function Page
SP IMP.••8¬MIN
REMOTE ID••ID1
En 122
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MON.CHK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.110) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”.
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
TU••••FM50/AM9
TV FORMAT•NTSC
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
MON.CHK••••YES
En 123
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz)
compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.
Settings
• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.124).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.120) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
MODE 1
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.
(4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack)
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not
be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
MODE 2
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
4K MODE•MODE 2
INIT••••CANCEL
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
UPDATE•••••USB
VERSION••xx.xx
En 124
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.123).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
1
Read the on-screen description.
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3
If “Update Success Please Power Off!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front
panel.
The firmware update is complete.
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.120). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.123).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
Information
icon
Message
System Icon
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
M
USI
C
N
E
T
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDM
I
AV
5
6
5
V-A
UX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
DI
O
T
U
NE
R
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 125
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.36). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.105).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.109). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 (p.115).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.109). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 (p.115).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.94).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.140). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.116) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.117).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.121).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode…
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu
to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the
unit when this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
En 126
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.22).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.117).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.121).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.22).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
En 127
Audio
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.121).
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.109).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.108).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.105).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.107).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.108).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.106).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
En 128
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.112).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.25).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.111).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.111). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.118).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 129
Video
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.122).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.142).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both
the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to other
than the HDMI 1–3 jack.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the
playback device to the HDMI 1–3 jack (p.27).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.25).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
En 130
FM/AM radio
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.94).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.61).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.61).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.62).
En 131
Bluetooth
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
The
Bluetooth
function of the unit is disabled. Enable the
Bluetooth
function (p.114).
Another
Bluetooth
device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current
Bluetooth
connection and then establish a new connection
(p.66).
The unit and the
Bluetooth
device are too far apart. Move the
Bluetooth
device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The
Bluetooth
device does not support A2DP. Use a
Bluetooth
device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the
Bluetooth
device is
not working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the
Bluetooth
device, and then establish a
connection between the
Bluetooth
device and the unit again (p.66).
No sound is produced, or the sound is
interrupted during playback.
The volume of the
Bluetooth
device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the
Bluetooth
device.
The
Bluetooth
device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the
Bluetooth
device to the unit.
The
Bluetooth
connection has been terminated.
Establish a
Bluetooth
connection between the
Bluetooth
device and the unit again
(p.66).
The unit and the
Bluetooth
device are too far apart. Move the
Bluetooth
device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.112). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.112).
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
En 132
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.73).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.113).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.113).
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.123).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 133
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.73).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.67).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.32).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.121).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
En 134
Use this diagram as a guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly.
Ideal speaker layout
12
3
45
6 7
99
ER
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
1 Front speaker (L)
2 Front speaker (R)
3 Center speaker
4 Surround speaker (L)
5 Surround speaker (R)
6 Surround back speaker (L)
7 Surround back speaker (R)
E Presence speaker (L)
R Presence speaker (R)
9 Subwoofer
10° to 30°10° to 30°
En 135
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448
MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.
This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
En 136
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of
digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
En 137
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers
with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear
sound filed of CINEMA DSP.
■ Supported devices
❑ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports
Bluetooth
devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
•A
Bluetooth
device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be
compatible, depending on the model.
❑ USB devices
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.
❑ iPod
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of April 2015)
Supported devices and file formats
Made for.
iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
(as of April 2015)
En 138
■ File formats
❑ USB/PC (NAS)
* Linear PCM format only
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
File
Sampling
frequency
(kHz)
Quantization
bitrate
(bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
WAV *
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/176.4/
192
16/24 — 2 ✔
MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
FLAC
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/176.4/
192
16/24 — 2 ✔
ALAC
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96
16/24 — 2 ✔
AIFF
32/44.1/48/
88.2/96/176.4/
192
16/24 — 2 ✔
DSD
2.8 MHz/
5.6 MHz
1—2—
En 139
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
m: Available
HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out
VIDEO
out
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p 4K
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i
480i/
576i
HDMI in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
1080p/50, 60 Hz mmmm
1080p/24 Hz mm
4K m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
480i/576i mmmmmmm
480p/576p m
720p m
1080i m
VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
VIDEO
out
VIDEO
in
En 140
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.25) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.27).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.54)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external
device operation keys
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
En 141
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
5
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
7
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
– “ARC” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the
instruction manual for the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a
digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.27).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To
use the SCENE function (p.54), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).
En 142
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
En 143
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &
DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and
DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha
Corporation is under license.
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
This receiver supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Google Noto Fonts
Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions
and limitations under the License.
Trademarks
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
En 144
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
[TSR-7790]
Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2)
[HTR-6068]
Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4)
Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)
•Video
Composite x 4 (AV 3–6)
Component x 2 (AV 1–2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX)
•Other
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
[TSR-7790]
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch)
(FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R
*1
, EXTRA SP L/R
*2
)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]
- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R)
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- ZONE2 OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
[HTR-6068]
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch)
(FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R
*1
, EXTRA SP L/R
*2
)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- ZONE2 OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT
- Component x 1
- Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
[TSR-7790]
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2)
[HTR-6068]
HDMI OUT x 1
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
(HDMI 1–3: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
• Link Function: CEC supported
Specifications
En 145
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
Bluetooth
• Sink Function
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
•
Bluetooth
Version................................................. Ver. 2.1+EDR
• Supported Profile................................................ A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec.....................................................SBC, AAC
• Wireless Output ............................................ Bluetooth Class 2
• Maximum Communication Distance....................... 10 m (33 ft)
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• WiFi function
- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection
and USB connection
- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed
Mode
- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz
- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[TSR-7790]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )
Front L/R................................................................. 95 W+95 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R............................................................. 110 W+110 W
Center..............................................................................110 W
Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W
Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W
[HTR-6068]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )
Front L/R................................................................. 90 W+90 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
[U.S.A. model]
Front L/R............................................................. 105 W+105 W
Center..............................................................................105 W
Surround L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W
Surround Back L/R ............................................. 105 W+105 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[TSR-7790]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R.....................................................................130 W/ch
Center .......................................................................130 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................130 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................130 W/ch
[HTR-6068]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R.....................................................................125 W/ch
Center .......................................................................125 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................125 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]..........................150 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6
/8
)
[TSR-7790]
Front L/R.....................................................................160 W/ch
Center ........................................................................160 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................160 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................160 W/ch
[HTR-6068]
Front L/R.....................................................................150 W/ch
Center ........................................................................150 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................150 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................150 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[TSR-7790]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) ..................................130/170/195/240 W
[HTR-6068]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) ..................................125/165/190/235 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 .............................100 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ............................. 200 mV/47 k
• Maximum Input Signal
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................2.3 V
En 146
• Output Level / Output Impedance
[TSR-7790]
PRE OUT...................................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
[HTR-6068]
SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Impedance ...................................... 16 Ω or more
• Frequency Response
AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ......................... +0/-3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ...............................0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV 5 etc. (Pure Direct) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
..........................................................................110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out)......................................150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
AV 5 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................. 70 dB/50 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range ............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back) ......12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type........................................NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level...........................1.5 Vp-p or more
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. model]..................................... 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono ............................................................................... 65 dB
Stereo .............................................................................. 64 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono .................................................................................0.5%
Stereo ................................................................................0.6%
• Antenna Input................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. model]......................................... 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. model].................................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. model].................................................................400 W
[Other models]................................................................300 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
......................................................................................... 0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off........................................................ 1.3 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired............................................................................. 2.4 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi) ............................................................. 2.4 W
Wireless Direct .............................................................. 2.5 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On
......................................................................................... 2.3 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On
......................................................................................... 3.1 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
[TSR-7790]....435 x 171 x 379 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-7/8”)
[HTR-6068]....435 x 171 x 378 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-7/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D)
(with wireless antenna upright)
[TSR-7790]....435 x 234 x 379 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 14-7/8”)
[HTR-6068]....435 x 234 x 378 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 14-7/8”)
•Weight
[TSR-7790] .................................................... 10.6 kg (23.4 lbs)
[HTR-6068].................................................... 10.0 kg (22.1 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
En 147
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!) 120, 124
Lock icon (o) 117
Numerics
2.1-channel system 20
2ch Stereo 57
4K Ultra HD 142
5.1-channel system 19
7.1-channel system 18
, 21, 22
7ch Stereo 57
A
Adaptive DRC 93
ADVANCED SETUP 121
AirPlay 80
AM radio 61
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 141
Audio Decoder (front display information) 91
Auto Power Standby 117
Auto Preset (FM radio) 65
B
Banana plug 22
Bluetooth 66
Bookmark 79
C
CINEMA DSP 56
Compressed Music Enhancer 60
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 36
D
Decoder Off (front display information) 91
Dialogue 93
, 119
Dimmer (Front Display) 116
DLNA 73
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 97
DSP Program (front display information) 91
E
ECO 117
Error indication (front display) 133
External power amplifier 33
Extra Bass 94
F
Firmware update 123, 124
FM radio 61
Frequency step setting 61
, 122
Front display information 91
H
HDCP 27, 129, 136
HDMI output selection 53
HDMI signal compatibility 142
I
Initial Volume 109, 115
Input (front display information) 91
Input Trim 94
Internet radio 77
iPod content playback 67
L
Lipsync 136
M
MAC Address Filter 113
Max Volume 109
, 115
Memory Guard 117
Menu language selection 35
Multiple room playback 82
MUTE 53
, 85
N
NAS content playback 74
Network Connection 112
Network information 120
Network Name 114
Network Standby 113
O
Option menu 92
P
Parametric EQ 107
Party mode 86
Power Amp Assign 105
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 62
Pure Direct 60
R
Radio Data System tuning 63
Remote control 14
Remote ID 121
Rename 96
, 99, 114
Repeat 69
, 72, 76
S
SCENE function 54
Setup menu 102
Short Message 116
Shortcut (Registering favorite items) 87
Shuffle 69
, 72, 76
Signal information 119
Sleep timer 14
Sound program 56
, 57
Speaker impedance 17
Standby Through 112
Straight decode 59
Subwoofer Trim 94
Surround decoder 59
T
Test Tone 108
Tone Control 93
Trigger function 33
Index
En 148
U
USB storage device content playback 70
V
Video/audio input jack combination 28
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 58
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 109
W
Wallpaper 116
Web control 88
Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) 112
Wireless (Wi-Fi) 45
, 112
Wireless Direct 51
, 112
WPS 47
Y
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 36
YPAO Volume 93
Z
Zone2 82, 115
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH003C0/EN2
Documenttranscriptie
AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Connecting an external power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 FEATURES 6 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 36 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Front panel (TSR-7790) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (TSR-7790 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Front panel (HTR-6068) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Rear panel (TSR-7790) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Rear panel (HTR-6068) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 PREPARATIONS 16 Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 PLAYBACK 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 53 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 32 Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 En 2 CONFIGURATIONS Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 95 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) . . . 99 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 119 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 121 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 En 3 APPENDIX 125 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) (TSR-7790) (HTR-6068) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. AM antenna FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the TSR-7790 (U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified. YPAO microphone • In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples. • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure • This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified. En 5 • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • Bluetooth . p.66 • iPod/iPhone . p.67 • USB . p.70 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.73 • Internet radio . p.77 • AirPlay . p.80 Supports 2- to 7.1-channel (plus presence) speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.36 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.56 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.60 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) • Playing back music in multiple rooms . p.82 (multi-zone) Network contents Control iPod/iPhone/ Bluetooth device USB device Speakers Audio Audio HDMI Control 4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV AV receiver (the unit) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.54 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control En 6 . p.140 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.27) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.56) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field even when no surround back speakers are connected. ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.25) When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.28). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.108). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.112). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to get more bass sounds… HDMI Control TV audio Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.94). Video from external device I want to change the on-screen menu language... ❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.44) The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router (access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router. Wi-Fi or Wireless Direct VSBS Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.35). I want to update the firmware... ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.58) Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.123). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.124). If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT). Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. ❑ Low power consumption (p.118) • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.100) The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption. • Input settings (p.95) • SCENE settings (p.98) • Various function settings (p.103) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.119) • System settings (p.121) En 7 Useful applications ■ AV CONTROLLER ■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) “AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control the available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source. “AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with cable connections between AV receiver and source devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the speaker system. Functions • Power on/off and volume adjustment Functions • Input, scene and sound mode selection • Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices) • DSP Parameter adjustment • Playback control (including music selection for some sources) • For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. • Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance with illustrations) • Viewing owner’s manual • For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play. En 8 Part names and functions Front panel (TSR-7790) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : AM TUNING A MAIN ZONE B PURE DIRECT ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL MEMORY INFO (WPS) PRESET FM INPUT VOLUME SCENE BD DVD YPAO MIC PHONES TV TONE CONTROL NET PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA C 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.111) • Standby Through is enabled (p.112) • Network Standby is enabled (p.113) • An iPod is being charged (p.67) 3 ZONE 2 key Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85). 4 ZONE CONTROL key Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.85). 5 INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.47). 6 MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62). D RADIO STRAIGHT (CONNECT) E F G H I VIDEO AUX HDMI IN J 7 PRESET keys 5V 1A L K F TONE CONTROL key Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62). Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.87). 8 FM and AM keys Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.93). G SCENE keys Switch between FM and AM (p.61). 9 Front display Displays information (p.11). Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.54). H PROGRAM keys 0 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55). I STRAIGHT key A TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.61). B PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60). C INPUT knob For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.30). K USB jack Selects an input source. D PHONES jack For connecting headphones. E YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36). En Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59). J VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack 9 For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod (p.67). L VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. Front panel (HTR-6068) 1 23 MAIN ZONE 4 56 7 8 9 : A B C YPAO MIC PURE DIRECT ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL INFO (WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TV TONE CONTROL NET PROGRAM 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.111) • Standby Through is enabled (p.112) • Network Standby is enabled (p.113) • An iPod is being charged (p.67) 3 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36). 4 ZONE 2 key Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85). 5 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 6 ZONE CONTROL key Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.85). 7 INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.47). STRAIGHT (CONNECT) SILENT CINEMA D RADIO E F G H I VIDEO AUX HDMI IN J 5V 1A K 8 MEMORY key L G SCENE keys Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62). 9 PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62). Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.87). Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.54). H PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55). 0 FM and AM keys Switch between FM and AM (p.61). I STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59). A Front display Displays information (p.11). J VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.30). B TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.61). C PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60). D PHONES jack K USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod (p.67). L VOLUME knob For connecting headphones. E INPUT keys Select an input source. F TONE CONTROL key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.93). En 10 Adjusts the volume. Front display (indicators) 1 2 3 4 5 678 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT 1 2 9: A B C PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE 2 VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR D 1 ECO Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.118). 2 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT1/OUT2 (TSR-7790 only) 7 Bluetooth indicator 8 PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.86). Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal OUT (HTR-6068 only) 0 ZONE2 3 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60) is working. 4 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56) is working. 5 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. G E Information display Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.66). 9 SLEEP Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. D F E Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.91). F ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.93) is working. Lights up when the sleep timer is on. Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.85). A MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. B Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. C VIRTUAL Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.56), or the virtual surround processing (p.58) is working. D Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. 6 Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.44). En 11 G Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker B Presence speaker (L) N Presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer Rear panel (TSR-7790) 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 9 8 0 (U.S.A. model) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A WIRELESS HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 NETWORK HDMI 5 (NET) HDCP2.2 IN 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR SPEAKERS COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND MONITOR OUT OPTICAL CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP VIDEO AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE SINGLE 1 2 AUDIO 1 A AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUR. BACK SURROUND ZONE OUT BC D E CENTER PRE OUT For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.84). 2 TRIGGER OUT jack For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function (p.33). 3 HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. 4 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.31). 5 HDMI 1–5 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44). 7 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.32). SUBWOOFER * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. F 1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 6 Wireless antenna FRONT 8 SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.21). 9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.34). 0 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.34). A PHONO jacks (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) For connecting to a turntable (p.30). B AUDIO 1–2 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.30). C AV 1–6 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). D ZONE2 OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.83). En 12 E MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.25). VIDEO jack For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.26). F PRE OUT jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or to an external power amplifier (p.33). Rear panel (HTR-6068) 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 9 : (U.S.A. model) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A WIRELESS HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 NETWORK HDMI 5 (NET) HDCP2.2 IN (BD/DVD) ARC OUT EXTRA SP REMOTE OPTICAL ANTENNA VIDEO ZONE2/F.PRESENCE (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR SPEAKERS COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND MONITOR OUT OPTICAL CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP VIDEO AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE 1 2 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT ZONE OUT AB C D 1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.84). 2 TRIGGER OUT jack For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function (p.33). 3 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 4 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.31). 5 HDMI 1–5 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). 6 Wireless antenna * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. E 8 SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.21). 9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.34). 0 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.34). D MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.25). VIDEO jack For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.26). E SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.33). A AUDIO 1–2 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.30). B AV 1–6 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). C ZONE2 OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.83). For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44). 7 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.32). En 13 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 z (receiver power) key 2 Turns on/off (standby) the unit. HDMI 1 2 3 V-AUX 5 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH 4 5 6 MAIN NET PARTY TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION H I J ENTER RETURN B C D E F G RADIO VOLUME ON SCREEN 9 : A HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD 7 8 USB ZONE 2 DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING K Select an input source for playback. HDMI 1–5 HDMI 1–5 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel) AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks AUDIO AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select “AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”) TUNER FM/AM radio BLUETOOTH Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.85). MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.54). 6 PROGRAM keys Select a sound program (p.55). 7 External device operation keys 8 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.61). BAND Switches between FM and AM radio. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. External device operation keys Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.140). Select a sound mode (p.55). C INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91). 5 SCENE keys SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Switches the iPod operation modes (p.69). A Radio keys B Sound mode keys 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.140). PRESET Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key 3 Input selection keys 4 9 Menu operation keys (TSR-7790 U.S.A. model) En 14 D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.62). F HDMI OUT key 1 (TSR-7790) Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.53). 2 (HTR-6068) Enables/disables video/audio output from the HDMI OUT jack (p.53). HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 3 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER Turns on/off the party mode (p.86). BLUETOOTH 4 5 G PARTY key AV 1 MAIN USB Adjust the volume. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD H VOLUME keys TV NET F G I MUTE key Mutes the audio output. J OPTION key RADIO Displays the option menu (p.92). 6 PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU 8 MUTE VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 9 B C D E Displays status information on the TV (p.91). I OPTION J DISPLAY K ENTER RETURN : A H K DISPLAY key BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT (TSR-7790 U.S.A. model) En 15 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.17) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.21) Connect the speakers to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.25) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.27) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.31) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna (p.32) Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. 7 Connecting other devices (p.33) Connect external devices, such as an external power amplifier (TSR-7790 only) and a device compatible with the trigger function. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.34) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.35) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.36) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! En 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.20). Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Front (L) Abbr. Function 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Surround back (L) 6 Surround back (R) 7 Surround back 8 Presence (L) E Presence (R) R Subwoofer 9 Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. 7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1 Front 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● *1 ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 ● ● ● ● ● Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. * ● Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56), the presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. ● ● ● *2 ● ● *2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● If you use five speakers in the front side, use two of them as front surround speakers (*1) or presence speakers (*2). We recommend using them as front surround speakers for enjoying unprocessed playback (p.59) or presence speakers for enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (p.56). • For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.134). • If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers. To reinforce the rear left/right sounds, use them as surround back speakers. To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers. • Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds. En 17 ● 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) E R 1 9 1 2 3 9 9 4 5 6 7 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. 6.1-channel system 7.1-channel system (using presence speakers) R 1 4 5 6 • The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.56). 9 3 4 7 E 2 1 2 9 3 2 3 4 5 5 8 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. En 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5.1-channel system Front 5.1-channel system (using presence speakers) E 1 9 R 1 2 9 3 4 2 3 5 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers) 4.1-channel system 1 9 1 2 4 2 5 9 3 4 Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”. • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). En 19 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Setting the speaker impedance 2.1-channel system Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 1 2 9 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). STRAIGHT 3 • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.8MIN 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “6 MIN”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1+2-, 7.1-, and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system. 7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE Caution The unit (rear) • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. CENTER FRONT CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND SINGLE 1 CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE 1 2 2 SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER • The illustrations of the unit (rear) used in this section are of the TSR-7790. Cables required for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – E R + – 1 2 1 2 Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) 9 3 9 4 5 6 7 En 21 9 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7.1-channel system (using presence speakers) ■ Connecting speaker cables 6.1-channel system EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE The unit (rear) SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 CENTER a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE 1 CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE 1 2 2 SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. d Tighten the terminal. + (red) b c FR ON T d E R 1 a - (black) 2 1 2 Using a banana plug (U.S.A. and Australia models only) 9 3 9 a Tighten the speaker terminal. 3 b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. 4 5 4 5 8 When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). En 22 Banana plug a b FR ON T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Push-type speaker terminals (HTR-6068 only) a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Press down the tab. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the terminal. d Release the tab. a Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE ZO EXT NE RA 2/F SP .PR ES E NC E d b + (red) c The unit (rear) SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP - (black) SINGLE 1 ■ Connecting the subwoofer 2 SUBWOOFER Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. Audio pin cable 1 CENT 2 ER FRON T 3 9 4 5 • The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks output the same signals. En 23 Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. • Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. HDCP2.2 HDMI cable Digital optical cable (BD/DVD) OPTICAL MONITOR OUT Component video cable • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. ❑ COAXIAL jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. ❑ VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. Digital coaxial cable • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features. • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. COAXIAL MONITOR OUT Video pin cable ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). Stereo pin cable En 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 Connecting a TV ■ Component/composite video connection Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. ■ HDMI connection Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. • (TSR-7790 only) You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.26). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) • If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. HDMI OUT HDCP2.2 2 TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI input 1 ARC HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 H HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H 2 1 REMOTE OPTICAL HDMI (BD/DVD) ARC ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) HDMI HDCP2.2 IN OUT ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 HDMI AM Video input (component video) COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR COM OPTICAL AV2 OPTICAL AV 1 AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack COMPONENT VIDEO MONITO O (TV) AV4 V VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SING AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) OPTICAL O TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A SUR. BA ZONE OUT HDMI OUT 2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H PR PR PB COMPONENT VIDEO PB Y MONITOR OUT Y 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT Audio output (digital optical) HDMI 1 HDCP2.2 IN TV PR REMOTE OPTICAL Y PB ANTENNA VIDEO PR (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM PB Y COAXIAL AV3 Y OPTICAL AV2 OPTICAL • You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: AV 1 PR PB Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT (TV) AV4 VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE OPTICAL O – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box AUDIO 1 • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. AV 5 AV 6 ZONE OUT SUR. BACK SURROUND C PR AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.140). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. En AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 25 O Audio output (digital optical) TV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) The unit (rear) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H HDCP2.2 IN 2 1 REMOTE OPTICAL VIDEO (BD/DVD) ARC OUT Video input (composite video) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack MONITOR OUT ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 V AM V VIDEO COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 OPTICAL MONITOR OUT (TV) AV4 AV 1 VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE OPTICAL O AUDIO 2 AUDIO 1 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUR. BACK SURROUND ZONE OUT C PR O AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) ■ Connecting another TV or a projector (TSR-7790 only) The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.53). HDMI OUT 2 jack TV The unit (rear) HDMI OUT HDCP2.2 TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A 2 HDMI OUT 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 H HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H ARC HDCP2.2 IN 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM AM HDMI (TV) AV4 COAXIAL TV (already connected) AV3 Y PR PB Y PB HDMI PR HDMI input COM AV2 MONITO OPTICAL HDMI V AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SING AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUR. BA ZONE OUT Projector • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 Connecting playback devices ■ Component video connection The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. – Connecting an iPod (p.67) – Connecting a USB storage device (p.70) Output jacks on video device Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Input jacks on the unit Video Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Audio Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Component video AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) • If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.28). Y TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI 1 HDMI 2 H HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL PB PR Y PB PR ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM Y AM COMPONENT VIDEO (TV) AV4 Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. PR HDCP2.2 IN ■ HDMI connection COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB HDMI OUT Video output (component video) COAXIAL PB AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR COM HDMI 1–5 jacks The unit (rear) AV2 V AV 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SING HDMI 5 WIRELESS HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 C C HDMI 5 (BD/DVD) AV2 (BD/DVD) ARC Y MONITO OPTICAL AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 COAXIAL SUR. BA ZONE OUT OPTICAL O ANTENNA (RADIO) FM O AM AV 1 OPTICAL Video device HDMI PR Y PB PR CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE SURROUND AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack HDMI output SPEAKERS COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT CENTER VIDEO VIDEO T VIDEO SINGLE 2 O1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 ZONE OUT SUR. BACK HDMI 1 SURROUND CENTER PRE OUT FRONT SUBWOOFER Audio output (digital optical or digital coaxial) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. HDMI Video device • The component video signals (other than 480i/576i signals) input to AV 1–2 jacks of the unit can be output from the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks only. To watch those videos, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.25). For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.139). If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–5, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.25). • If your video device supports HDCP 2.2, connect the device to the HDMI 1–3 jacks. En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Composite video connection ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Composite video Video Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO) AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jack HDMI HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HD HDCP2.2 HDC V HDCP2.2 2 Audio Digital optical HDMI 1–5 AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial HDMI 1–5 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo HDMI 1–5 AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Analog stereo AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 VIDEO VIDEO IN Video Video output (composite video) Component video TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A Audio V 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL ❑ Necessary setting ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 A For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y Video device OPTICAL PB O AV2 O OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Video output (component video) COAXIAL C C The unit (rear) COAXIAL AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AV 5 AV 6 L Z L L R R HDMI OUT R The unit (rear) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC Y OPTICAL PR PB ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV2 AV4 Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) PR HDCP2.2 IN OUT REMOTE Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack, AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack, AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A PR PR PB PB Y Y AM COAXIAL PB AV3 Y PR PB Y Y PB AV2 OPTICAL AV 1 AUDIO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. L L L AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE AV 5 AV 6 ZONE O R R R AV 5 • To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack (p.25) or to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.26) of the unit. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.139). En AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks 28 Audio output (analog stereo) Video device 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 • The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. 2 Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. 6 7 Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. 8 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used). V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER USB NET N BLUETOOTH TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN 3 4 5 AV 2 DISPLAY ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER This completes the necessary settings. If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be used) and press the cursor key (q). En 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.67) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.70). Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. ❑ HDMI connection Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. BD DVD TV NET RADIO * TSR-7790 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models) PHONES The unit (rear) Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) AV 1–6 jacks AUDIO 1–2 jacks TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A SILENT CINEMA HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 REMOTE VIDEO OPTICAL (TV) AV4 5V 1A C ANTENNA (RADIO) FM AM COAXIAL O L AV3 PR PB COAXIAL Y PB C OPTICAL L MONITOR OUT R VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE L AUDIO 1 Audio device PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 AV 1 HDMI IN The unit (front) COAXIAL Y (CONNECT) VIDEO AUX (BD/DVD) ARC OPTICAL STRAIGHT OPTICAL 1 OUT PROGRAM HDMI 4 HDCP2.2 2 TONE CONTROL HDMI O HDMI OUT IN YPAO MIC AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 ZONE OUT SUR. BACK SURROUND CENTER PRE OU Game console R R If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6 or AUDIO, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.25). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that match the output jacks on your device. En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna AM antenna The unit (rear) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A WIRELESS HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 NETWORK HDMI 5 (NET) HDCP2.2 IN 2 1 ARC OUT (BD/DVD) REMOTE OPTICAL ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM COAXIAL AV3 Y PB PR Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 MONITOR OUT OPTICAL SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND CENTER FRONT VIDEO AV 1 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO Assembling and connecting the AM antenna Hold down Insert Release • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. Connecting the network cable Preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). Internet If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight. Network Attached Storage (NAS) For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.44). WAN LAN Modem PC Network cable The unit (rear) Router WIRELESS ESS WIREL NETWORK (NET) EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE Mobile device (such as iPod touch and iPhone) SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 • Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it. • If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network Connection” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”. • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.112). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.120) in the “Information” menu. En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7 Connecting other devices Connecting an external power amplifier 4 FRONT jacks (TSR-7790 only) 5 SUBWOOFER1–2 jacks Output front channel sounds. For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them. When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function Caution The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack with a monaural mini-jack cable. • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making connections. – Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. – When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. – When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to the amplifier. TRIGGER OUT jack TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI OUT The unit (rear) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC REMOTE OPTICAL WIRELESS MI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 P2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 NETWORK HDMI 5 System connector jack HDCP2.2 IN OUT AM (NET) COAXIAL DVD) AV3 EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE Y ANTENNA Y PB PR AV 1 PB MO OPTICAL AM Y PR PB AV2 (RADIO) FM PR VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SPEAKERS COMPONENT VIDEO CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND MONITOR OUT CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP VIDEO AUDIO 1 SINGLE 1 SINGLE AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 ZONE OUT Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection 2 ZONE 2 AV 6 ZONE OUT SUR. BACK SURROUND CENTER PRE OUT FRONT SUBWOOFER The unit (rear) 123 4 5 1 SUR. BACK jacks • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). 2 SURROUND jacks Output surround channel sounds. 3 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. VOLTAGE SELECTOR The unit (rear) VOLTAGE SELECTOR EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE 220V240V 110V120V NT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) To an AC wall outlet NETWORK (NET) EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE SPEAKERS WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language HDMI 1 2 3 4 Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 1 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. MODE TUNING PRESET To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 • The information on the front display is provided in English only. 4 En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) HDMI 1 2 3 4 The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 • If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO. • If you want to use the surround speakers for the front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.19), set “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu to “Front”. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. RADIO VOLUME – Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children. OPTION • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. – Test tone volume cannot be adjusted. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. • Note the following regarding YPAO measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 4 ENTER – Keep the room as quiet as possible. RETURN – Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone. – Do not connect headphones. YPAO MIC jack SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP The unit (front) YPAO MIC PRESET ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN 1 9 4 2 3 YPAO 5 microphone Ear height 9 MAX En 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 (HTR-6068) 2 5 The following screen appears on the TV. HDMI 1 3 4 a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER. V-AUX 5 (TSR-7790 only) If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single). AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO This completes the preparations. VOLUME See “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.38) to start the measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Settings OPTION (TSR-7790) ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Yes Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). No (default) Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). The following screen appears on the TV. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. Proceed to Step 5. • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. • To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and select “Manual Setup” (p.105). En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Single measure Multi measure (5 listening positions) HDMI 1 2 3 4 Follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the measurement. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 1 HDMI OUT a d TV NET PROGRAM MUTE e To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. bac SCENE BD DVD Measuring at one listening position (single measure) RADIO VOLUME • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. TOP MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) POP-UP/MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT b c a e d c a b d 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.42) or “Warning messages” (p.43). This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (TSR-7790 only)” (p.39) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.38) En 38 • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.41). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 HDMI 1 2 3 4 To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.42) or “Warning messages” (p.43). SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (TSR-7790 only) RADIO The adjusted speaker settings are applied. VOLUME 1 The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. BAND MODE TUNING To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.93) in the “Option” menu. 5 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). En 39 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 5 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.93) in the “Option” menu. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.41). 7 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. En 40 Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Checking the measurement results 3 HDMI 1 2 3 You can check the YPAO measurement results. 4 1 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. NET PARTY ZONE 2 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU The following screen appears. RADIO 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.102). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 ON SCREEN 2 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 BAND MODE TUNING 1 Measurement result items PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 Measurement result details ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) * TSR-7790 only 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-10: Internal Error Remedy Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1: Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.41) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.41) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. En 43 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. Mobile device (such as iPhone) Internet The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.51). Wireless router • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.32) or the wireless network connection (p.45). Modem • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Internet radio – Network services – Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS) Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit • For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website. For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.45). • You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.32) or Wireless Direct (p.51). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. En 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z Connecting the unit to a wireless network HDMI 1 2 3 There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Select a connection method according to your environment. Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch)? HDMI OUT Yes 6 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. A (p.45) SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU No RADIO Does your wireless router (access point) have a WPS button? VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN No Cursor keys ENTER RETURN B (p.47) ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Yes C (p.48) • The checkmark indicates the current setting. DISPLAY BAND ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. En 45 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 HDMI 1 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. V-AUX 5 ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 1 NET PARTY ZONE 2 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-Fi screen. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO VOLUME The following connection methods are available. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Wireless (WAC*) You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”. (You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.) USB Cable You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable”. (You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.) OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT The name of the unit 2 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”. Tap here to start setup * This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. The network currently selected When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to the selected network (access point). En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable z HDMI 1 2 3 4 If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit. V-AUX 5 1 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB The unit (front) HDMI OUT SCENE TV RADIO HDMI IN PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 1 2 VIDEO AUX NET 5V 1A VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. • This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. NET PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. ■ B: Using the WPS push button configuration Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and press ENTER. 3 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 4 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 47 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 ■ C: Using other connection methods If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. 1 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. OPTION RETURN 0 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. RADIO VOLUME ON SCREEN 8 WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.45). Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.49). Manual Setting You can set up a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.49). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN code” (p.50). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 4 7 The following connection methods are available. Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. About WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. En 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 ❑ Searching for an access point ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 1 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point and select “NEXT”. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the security method of the access point and select “NEXT”. The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. SCENE BD DVD Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. 2 RADIO Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode En 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 HDMI 1 2 3 4 If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 4. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB HDMI OUT If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU ❑ Using the PIN code If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. NET PARTY ZONE 2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. RADIO The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. 2 POP-UP/MENU 3 ON SCREEN OPTION RETURN Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). VOLUME ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 4 If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 50 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 2 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless Direct” and select “OK”. • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD 7 Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. V-AUX 5 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) ON SCREEN Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • The checkmark indicates the current setting. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the desired security method and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Settings None, WPA2-PSK (AES) • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. En 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 HDMI 1 2 3 4 If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 10. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. Otherwise, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. HDMI OUT TV NET For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available access points. c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in Step 10. SCENE BD DVD 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. RADIO 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press ENTER to save the setting. The settings made appear on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a mobile device. En 52 PLAYBACK HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET 1 MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Input selection keys Basic playback procedure 1 HDMI OUT HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MUTE VOLUME 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. ON SCREEN For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61) BAND MODE TUNING • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.70) SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT 9 0 b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. VOL. • Playing back iPod music (p.67) MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO a Press ON SCREEN. • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE On-screen input selection Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION ENTER Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 4 HDMI OUT 1 • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.73) HDMI OUT 1+2 (TSR-7790 only) Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. • Listening to Internet radio (p.77) HDMI OUT 1 Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 (TSR-7790) or HDMI OUT (HTR-6068) jack. HDMI OUT 2 (TSR-7790 only) Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack. HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80) 4 L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.93). (TSR-7790 only) • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.54). • When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) En 53 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) HDMI 1 2 3 4 The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack (TSR-7790 only) with just one touch. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 1 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SCENE Press SCENE. BD DVD TV NET RADIO Input HDMI 1 AV 4 NET RADIO TUNER Sound program MOVIE (Sci-Fi) STRAIGHT MUSIC (7ch Stereo) MUSIC (7ch Stereo) SCENE BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Compressed Music Enhancer HDMI output jack (TSR-7790 only) Off On On On HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 En 54 Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. • Select an input source (p.53) • Select a sound program (p.55) • Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60) By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. ENTER DISPLAY 1 The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. OPTION RETURN Configuring scene assignments • (TSR-7790 only) Selecting an HDMI output jack (p.53) 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOL. SET Complete L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.97). • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.98) in the “Scene” menu. Selecting the sound mode HDMI 1 2 3 4 The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies HDMI OUT TV NET MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN PROGRAM ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “DSP Program” menu (p.99). • Press MUSIC repeatedly. • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (p.59) is automatically selected. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.57). ❑ Selecting a surround decoder BAND TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback DISPLAY MODE MOVIE b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. RADIO This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.56). PROGRAM a Press ON SCREEN. • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE BD DVD On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.59). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.59). ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.60). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.60). En 55 • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.11) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.119). ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. ❑ MOVIE THEATER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up VOL. Hall in Vienna FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR Sound program • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. • We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields. • If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. • When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. En 56 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❑ LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.58) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. En 57 ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. • When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front (p.19) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual CINEMA FRONT. When “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front. • When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. En 58 Enjoying unprocessed playback HDMI 1 2 3 You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) HDMI OUT When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION ENTER VOL. RETURN STRAIGHT DISPLAY BAND INFO SLEEP • For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.135). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. VOL. †‡PLƒx MOVIE bPLIIx Movie bPLII Movie SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC • Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and the selected decode type (p.100). SUR.DECODE PRESET MOVIE The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR MODE TUNING ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • If “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.58) works when multichannel source is played back. bPLIIx Music bPLII Music bPLIIx Game bPLII Game L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. En 59 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) HDMI 1 2 3 When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 1 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Press PURE DIRECT. RADIO MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME PURE DIRECT L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 VOL. PROGRAM Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) “ENHANCER” lights up OPTION • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs ENHANCER VOL. RETURN – Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu DISPLAY – Using the multi-zone function BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC INFO SLEEP L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Enhancer On • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.94) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. En 60 Listening to FM/AM radio HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TUNER HDMI OUT • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. RADIO • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Selecting a frequency for reception 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM). VOL. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Setting the frequency steps VOLUME ON SCREEN At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT 1 2 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 0 FM 87.50MHz (Asia and General models only) POP-UP/MENU 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STEREO TUNED VOL. FM 98.50MHz L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. PROGRAM 3 • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”. • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. TUFM50/AM9 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. En 61 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) HDMI 1 2 3 You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TV NET • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “Auto Preset” (p.65). HDMI OUT MUTE 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station RADIO Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. PROGRAM Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. TUNER SCENE BD DVD ■ Selecting a preset station VOLUME STEREO TUNED VOL. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.61) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT STEREO TUNED VOL. 9 01:FM 98.50MHz 0 Numeric keys MEMORY 01:FM 98.50MHz L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Preset number • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. STEREO TUNED VOL. 02:Empty L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered En 62 • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65). Radio Data System tuning • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. HDMI 1 2 3 (U.K. and Europe models only) 4 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT 0 • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.65). 2 Press INFO. When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. ■ Receiving traffic information automatically ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type 4 • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO INFO SBL • To cancel the search, press RETURN. SBR • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. CHARGE OUT ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE CLASSICS ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL SBL SLEEP MUTE VOL. TP FM101.30MHz VOL. ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SBR ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL SBL SBR Traffic information station (frequency) Information Program Service Program service name • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency En 63 Operating the radio on the TV HDMI 1 2 3 You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB TUNER NET PARTY ZONE 2 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE ■ Playback screen RADIO 2 VOLUME 1 TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.63), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. 2 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 64 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 3 HDMI OUT 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Preset station list PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Utility 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. En 65 Playing back music via Bluetooth HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on the unit. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB HDMI OUT The unit SCENE BD DVD TV Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit. BLUETOOTH NET PARTY ZONE 2 NET RADIO Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) • The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME • To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source. 2 On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit) from the available device list. OPTION • For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.137). ENTER RETURN A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 3 4 On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback. The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is displayed on the TV. • If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection. • To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations. – Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device. – Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit. – Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu. • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 66 Playing back iPod music HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET Playback of iPod content • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.137). You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. • The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay (p.80). 1 RADIO Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Connecting an iPod VOLUME Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. MODE TUNING The unit (front) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT (CONNECT) 3 HDMI IN 5V 1A 2 4 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. VOL. Connected L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.69). En 67 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB HDMI OUT 4 SCENE TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status (such as play/pause). OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MOVIE 3 5 NET PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD 1 2 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 ■ Playback screen Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 68 ■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play) HDMI 1 2 3 1 4 V-AUX 5 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. AV 1 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU ■ Shuffle/repeat settings Operate your iPod itself to start playback. RADIO • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Item BAND MODE MODE TUNING Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP Shuffle (Shuffle) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT 9 0 4 Repeat (Repeat) 4 En 69 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on a USB storage device HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). OPTION • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.137). Connecting a USB storage device 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. The unit (front) ENTER Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. RADIO RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE STRAIGHT TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE VIDEO AUX PRESET MUSIC (CONNECT) HDMI IN 5V 1A ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT USB storage device • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. VOL. Connected L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. En 70 2 HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. V-AUX 5 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87). MUSIC 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down En 71 Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. ■ Playback screen HDMI 1 2 3 You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 4 V-AUX 5 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 3 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. External device operation keys PRESET • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. MODE TUNING • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. 4 En 72 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.32). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.120) in the “Information” menu. • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.137). 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Media sharing setup • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. En 73 Playback of PC music contents 3 HDMI 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. NET HDMI OUT 1 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. BAND MODE TUNING • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87). PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. En 74 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 3 5 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD 1 2 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 ■ Playback screen TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status (such as play/pause). Function 1 Page Up Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS). Return Returns to the higher-level list. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.97). Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 10 Pages Down En 75 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. VOLUME • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 76 Listening to Internet radio HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. V-AUX 5 Playback of Internet radio AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 NET HDMI OUT • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.32). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.120) in the “Information” menu. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. RADIO • This service may be discontinued without notice. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 4 • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87). En 77 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 3 5 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD 1 2 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 ■ Playback screen TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 2 List name 2 Playback information Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER 1 Playback indicator 3 Contents list POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Playback indicator 4 Item number/total Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Menu Function Bookmark On Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder (p.79). Bookmark On (Bookmark Off) Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the “Bookmarks” folder (p.79). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Up 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. • You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 78 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) HDMI 1 2 3 By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the browse screen. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ■ Registering the station on the browse/playback screen NET PARTY ZONE 2 3 HDMI OUT Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. You can switch the language. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse screen or start playback of it to display the playback screen. 2 Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Enter the vTuner ID in this area. DISPLAY BAND • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”. MODE TUNING PRESET • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Check the vTuner ID of the unit. You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.120) in the “Information” menu. En 79 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. • To unregister a station, select “My Favorites” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. Playing back music with AirPlay Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. iTunes Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. PC (wired or wireless) 1 Router The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( iTunes (example) (wired or wireless) iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example) ) appears. iPod iOS6 (example) iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.120) in the “Information” menu. • When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.137). • You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay password (p.90). Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. • The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. En 80 ■ Playback screen • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. 3 • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.97) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. NET PARTY ZONE 2 1 2 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. V-AUX 5 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO Caution PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Menu Function Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 81 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in another room (Zone2). Preparing Zone2 For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Study room (Zone2) Living room (Main zone) • Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and Bluetooth, USB, and network sources can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 5–6 or AUDIO 1–2 jacks) of the unit. The party mode (p.86) allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type. En 82 ■ Using the unit’s internal amplifier ■ Using an external amplifier Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) T HDMI OUT EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 2 1 PTICAL The unit (rear) (BD/DVD) ARC UT ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM OAXIAL SPEAKERS AV3 CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND CENTER FRONT Y SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PR PB Y PB ZONE2 OUT jacks PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 MONITOR OUT PTICAL VIDEO SINGLE AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE L R AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUR. BACK SU ZONE OUT External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) ZONE 2 ZONE OUT 1 9 2 FL FR 3 L Q W R 1 4 2 AUDIO 5 9 6 3 7 Zone2 4 5 6 7 Main zone Zone2 • When Zone2 output is enabled (p.85), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. En Main zone 83 ■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection) Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks IN HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 IN IN OUT OUT HDCP2.2 IN OUT1 2 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE REMOTE OPTICAL ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 REMOTE AM REMOTE COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB AV 1 Infrared signal receiver PR AV2 MO OPTICAL VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO 2 AUDIO 1 Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 ZONE OUT Remote control The unit (rear) Zone2 Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control (supplied with each device) Zone2 Main zone En 84 z Controlling Zone2 4 HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 AV 5–6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET 1 2 HDMI OUT MAIN/ZONE2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO VOLUME MUTE VOLUME 3 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press z (receiver power). For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61) When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. • Playing back iPod music (p.67) Use the following keys to select an input source. AV 5–6: AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN AUDIO: AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select “AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”) OPTION RETURN BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING USB: USB jack (on the front panel) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.70) • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.73) • Listening to Internet radio (p.77) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80) TUNER: FM/AM radio ENTER Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. NET: NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or web control (p.88) to control Zone2. • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. 4 • You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. • To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of time. • To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the unit’s internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume control on it. • The Zone 2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone 2 input with the web control (p.88) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8). • To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input or use the party mode (p.86). Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. En 85 ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) HDMI 1 2 3 4 The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT PARTY SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Press PARTY. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 En 86 Useful functions HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 Registering favorite items (shortcut) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT BLUETOOTH USB NET You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO • You can also use the “Bookmark” feature to register Internet radio stations. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual contents cannot be registered. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ■ Registering an item OPTION ENTER 1 2 DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 1 2 Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB. Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40). You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut. 01:USB L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. • “No Presets” appears when no items are registered. Press MEMORY. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number. VOL. Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number. RETURN ■ Recalling a registered item MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT – A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to this unit. VOL. 01:Empty Numeric keys MEMORY L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR – A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network. Shortcut number (flashes) – The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service. – The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location. • To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric keys to select the shortcut number after step 2. VOL. 02:Empty L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered 3 To confirm the registration, press MEMORY. En 87 – A BLUETOOTH connection cannot be established. • When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again. Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser. Web browser • You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.120) in the “Information” menu. • You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.90) to access the web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may change each time the unit is turned on. Web control (wired or wireless) PC • If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.113), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction manual. Web control (wired or wireless) Router • If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way. The unit – Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the screen. • By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8). • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. • Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases, configure the security software appropriately. • To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode, set “Network Standby” (p.90) to “On”. • We recommend using one of the following web browsers. – Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x – Safari 7.x 1 2 Start the web browser. Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser. (Example) En 88 ■ Top menu screen ■ Control screen 3 1 5 1 6 2 3 4 4 5 7 2 1 CONTROL 6 1 PLAY INFO Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone. 2 STATUS 2 TOP MENU Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. Moves to the top menu screen. 3 SETTINGS 3 SCENE Moves to the settings screen. Selects a scene for the selected zone. 4 PARTY MODE 4 POWER Turns on/off the party mode (p.86). Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. 5 SYSTEM POWER 5 VOLUME Turns on/off the power for all zones. Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. 6 MAIN VOLUME 6 RELOAD Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. Reloads the current status of the unit. 7 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. • Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used. En 89 ■ Settings screen 2 BACK Moves to the top menu screen. 3 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. 1 Note • If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit. • When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other external devices. 2 • Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode. 3 • The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific information (such as MAC address and IP address). • Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit. 1 Rename Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.114) or the name of each zone (p.115). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Network Selects the network connection method (p.112) or configures the network parameters (such as IP address) (p.112). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. AirPlay Password Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.80). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. MAC Filter Sets the MAC address filter (p.113) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Auto Reload Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds. Network Standby Enables/disables the network standby function (p.113). Backup/Recovery Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup. Firmware Update Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update. Create Link Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen. Tips Displays tips for use of the web control. Licenses Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit. En 90 Viewing the current status HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 Switching information on the front display AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TUNER 1 HDMI OUT Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Input source group Bluetooth USB SERVER AirPlay RADIO VOL. PROGRAM MUTE Audio Decoder VOLUME L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR NET RADIO Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * During simple playback of iPod: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name TOP MENU About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Viewing the status information on the TV ENTER VOL. RETURN DISPLAY †‡PLƒx MOVIE DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR 1 Information PRESET * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. MOVIE Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Compressed Music Enhancer status • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item HDMI 1–5 V-AUX AV 1–6 AUDIO 1–2 Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.63). Input source/ Party mode status Volume/ YPAO Volume status Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode CINEMA DSP status 2 En 91 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) Option menu items You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. • Default settings are underlined. VOL. Tone Control L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Front display Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 93 Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 93 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 93 YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Dialogue (Dialog) 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lvl) 93 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) 93 Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Subwoofer/Bass (SW.Trim) (Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. (Extra Bass) TV screen Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. En 92 94 94 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 94 Video Processing (Video Process.) Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 94 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 94 Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 94 FM Mode (FM Mode) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 94 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 63 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.69), USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.69), USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76). — Input Trim Input Settings (In.Trim) (Input Settings) Video Out (V.Out) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Page ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments Settings Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled. • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. Adjusting with the front panel controls a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”. Output level b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. ■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC. On Off Volume: high Output level Volume: low Input level YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) On Off Input level ■ Dialogue (Dialog) Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Settings Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume. On (On) Enables YPAO Volume. Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Setting range 0 to 3 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) • YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.36). Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. • We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers are used. – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.56) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) En 93 ■ Video Processing (Video Process.) Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured in “Processing” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu. Settings Direct (Direct) Ideal position Disables the video signal processing. Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. ■ Input Settings (Input Settings) Configures the input settings. ■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass) Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Input Trim (In.Trim) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Extra Bass (Extra Bass) Video Out (V.Out) Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Settings Settings Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass. On (On) Enables Extra Bass. Off (Off) Does not output video. HDMI 1–5 (HDMI1–5), AV 1–6 (AV1–6), Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. V-AUX (V-AUX) ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60). Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Settings • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) En 94 Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. CONFIGURATIONS 4 Configuring input sources (Input menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Default settings are underlined. The input source of the unit also changes. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 96 Audio In Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. 96 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 96 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 97 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 97 • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 95 Page ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Audio In Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. Input sources HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2, USB • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output ■ Setup procedure 1 • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (such as game consoles) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). Input sources HDMI 1–5, AV 1–2 ■ Setup procedure (To input audio through a digital optical jack) Select “AV1” or “AV4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital optical cable. (To input audio through a digital coaxial jack) Select “AV2” or “AV3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital coaxial cable. • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. 2 3 4 (To input audio through analog audio jacks) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–4 Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 96 Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.54) using the TV screen. Input sources AirPlay Settings Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 97 4 ■ Load Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. Device Control Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Settings 5 6 Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off Scene menu items Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 98 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. 98 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 99 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 99 • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.140). Detail Displays the assignments of the selected scene. ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack [TSR-7790 only]) in the selected scene. • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.54). En 98 Input Input source to be used HDMI Output (TSR-7790 only) HDMI OUT jack to be used Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off ■ Rename/Icon Select Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Setup procedure 1 2 3 You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.54) for the selected scene. En 99 4 DSP Program menu items Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Settings for sound programs Item Function Decode Type bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), bPLIIx Selects a surround decoder to be used Game* (bPLII Game*), in combination with the selected sound Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* program. (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 100 Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Settings 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. ■ Settings for decoders Item Function Settings Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Reverb Delay Reverb Level Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type Function 2ch Stereo Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Direct Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off, On Select “On” to wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 3 to 7 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to 0 to +3 Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). bPLIIx Music The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Sound program Item Item Settings Auto, Off Neo:6 Music Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5 Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. Left / Right Balance Adjusts the left and right volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance using the presence speakers. 0 to 5 to 10 Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off, On 7ch Stereo • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. En 101 4 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. En 102 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Setup menu items Menu Item Function Page Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 36 Selects a speaker system. 105 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 105 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 105 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 105 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 106 Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 106 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 106 Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. 106 Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 106 Auto Setup Power Amp Assign Configuration Speaker Manual Setup Lipsync Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 107 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 107 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 107 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 108 Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 108 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 108 Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 109 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 109 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 109 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 109 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 109 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 109 Adjustment Sound Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 109 Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 110 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 111 HDMI Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 112 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 112 En 103 Menu Network Bluetooth Multi Zone Item Function Page Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 112 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 112 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 113 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 113 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 114 Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 114 Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 66 Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 114 Main Zone Set Audio Receive Zone2 Set Disconnect Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 115 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 115 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 115 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 115 Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 115 Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 116 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 116 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 116 Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 116 Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 117 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 117 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 117 Party Mode Set Display Set Function Trigger Output ECO ECO Mode Language Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 118 Select an on-screen menu language. 118 En 104 Speaker (Manual Setup) Front Configures the speaker settings manually. Selects the size of the front speakers. Settings • Default settings are underlined. Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. ■ Power Amp Assign Settings Selects a speaker system. Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection. Settings Basic Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection). 7ch +1ZONE Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.83) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone. 5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp connections (p.23). Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). En 105 Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Surround Back Subwoofer Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. Settings Settings Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Small x2 Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. Normal Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Use None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. Choices Surround • This setting is not available in the following cases: –“Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP” Settings –“Surround” is set to “None” –“Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front” Front Presence Rear Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the room. Front Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.58) works in this case. Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. Settings Use Select this option when presence speakers are connected. None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected. • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers • This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP” or “7ch +1ZONE”. Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. En 106 ■ Distance ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. 1 2 3 Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. Setting range 0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.36) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 ■ Level Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) ■ Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB Settings Manual 5 Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 6 • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.36). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. En 107 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Test Tone Sound Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Configures the audio output settings. Settings Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. Choices HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2 Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. En 108 ■ Adaptive DSP Level Adjustment Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. Settings Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Settings Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Adjusts the effect level automatically. Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). ■ Dynamic Range Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode • “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. Maximum Off Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. ■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected. Settings ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). On Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back. ■ Initial Volume Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) En 109 Video Aspect Configures the video output settings. Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Direct Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not displayed on the TV screen. Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.122) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) En 110 HDMI ARC Configures the HDMI settings. Enables/disables ARC (p.141) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Standby Sync ■ HDMI Control Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.140). Settings Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.140) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2 Default AV 4 • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. En 111 ■ Audio Output Network Selects a device to output audio. Configures the network settings. • This setting (except for “HDMI OUT2” [TSR-7790 only]) is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On Enables the audio output from the speakers. ■ Network Connection Selects the network connection method. HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 (TSR-7790 only) HDMI OUT (TV) (HTR-6068 only) Settings Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable (p.32) Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.45). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.51). Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. ■ Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). DHCP Settings Select whether to use a DHCP server. Off (This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the power saving mode. Settings En 112 Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). ■ MAC Address Filter ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Filter Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings Off Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. • AirPlay (p.80) and DMC (p.97) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. MAC Address 1–10 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Procedure ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Enables the network standby function. (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.) En 113 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Name Bluetooth Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Configures the Bluetooth settings. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.66). Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth function. On Enables the Bluetooth function. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 ■ Bluetooth Standby Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function. On Enables the Bluetooth standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) • This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.113) is set to “Off”. En 114 ■ Zone2 Set Multi Zone Configures the Zone2 settings. Configures the multi zone settings. Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. Initial Volume ■ Main Zone Set Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Configures the main zone setting. Settings Zone Rename Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.115). ■ Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.86). Choice Target: Zone 2 Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 115 Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. Function ■ Trigger Output Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Settings Power The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone.” Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone.” An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.” Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual.” ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. Dimmer (Front Display) Source Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Choices HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB Settings • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.118) is set to “On”. Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Settings Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. Manual On Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings Piano Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. En 116 Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High Transmits the electronic signal. Target Zone ECO Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Configures the power supply settings. Settings Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. All When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2. ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. ■ Memory Guard Settings Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 Minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input signals are detected for 20 minutes. 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Settings Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes Other models: Off • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. En 117 ■ ECO Mode Language Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. Select an on-screen menu language. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. Settings English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. En 118 Types of information Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ■ Audio Signal You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. 1 2 Displays information about the current audio signal. Press ON SCREEN. Format Audio format of the input signal Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Input Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Dialogue Output 3 The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal The speaker terminals from which signals are output • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) ■ HDMI Monitor 4 Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV • (TSR-7790 only) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. En 119 ■ Network ■ System Displays the network information on the unit. Displays the system information on the unit. (When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.121) IP address TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.122) Subnet Mask Subnet mask Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.121) Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.122) DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server System ID System ID number DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit IP Address MAC Address (Ethernet) MAC address MAC Address (Wi-Fi) vTuner ID vTuner ID Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection SSID (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) The SSID of the wireless network • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.124). ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2. (When using Wireless Direct) SSID The SSID of the wireless network Security Security method Security Key Security key IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication En 120 Input The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume setting for Zone2 Item Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Function Page UPDATE Updates the firmware. 123 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 123 Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) Set the unit to standby mode. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. SP IMP.••8¬MIN MAIN ZONE z Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings PROGRAM 3 4 5 STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. 6 MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8 MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. REMOTE ID••ID1 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. • Default settings are underlined. Item Function SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 121 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 121 TU (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 122 Settings ID1, ID2 Page TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 122 MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 122 4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. 123 INIT Restores the default settings. 123 En ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control 1 121 To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for 3 seconds. To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for 3 seconds. Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) (Asia and General models only) TU••••FM50/AM9 MON.CHK••••YES Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.110) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Settings Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) TV FORMAT•NTSC YES Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”. Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL En 122 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) Updating the firmware (UPDATE) 4K MODE•MODE 2 UPDATE•••••USB Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit. New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. Settings MODE 1 MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format. (4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack) Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices • When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps. Restoring the default settings (INIT) USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.124). INIT••••CANCEL Restores the default settings for the unit. Checking the firmware version (VERSION) Choices VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. VERSION••xx.xx Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.120) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. En 123 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network HDMI 1 2 3 4 New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE Note RADIO • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). TOP MENU • If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.123). VOLUME • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.120). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN If “Update Success Please Power Off!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. HDMI OUT SCENE 3 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.123). Information icon BAND A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. En 124 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.36). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.105). I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.109). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.115). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.117). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.109). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.115). When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.121). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.94). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode… I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.140). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, En 125 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.22). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.117). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.121). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.22). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. En 126 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.121). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. Audio Problem No sound. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.109). A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The volume cannot be increased. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.108). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.105). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.107). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.108). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.106). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. En 127 Problem No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.112). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.25). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.111). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.111). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. Noise/hum is heard. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.118). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. The sound is distorted. En 128 Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.122). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.142). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2. The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to other than the HDMI 1–3 jack. To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback device to the HDMI 1–3 jack (p.27). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.25). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. En 129 FM/AM radio Problem Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.94). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.61). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Select the station manually (p.61). The AM radio signal is weak. Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.62). Auto Preset has been used. En 130 Bluetooth Problem A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted during playback. Cause Remedy The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.114). Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.66). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP. The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working for some reason. Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.66). The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit. The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.66). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. Cause Remedy USB and network Problem The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.112). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.112). The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. En 131 Problem Cause Remedy Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.73). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.113). The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.113). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.123). Wireless network is not found. The unit does not detect the PC. The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. The iPod does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. En 132 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.73). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.67). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.32). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. No device The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.121). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. Unable to play En 133 Ideal speaker layout Use this diagram as a guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly. E R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1 9 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 2 9 3 Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 1 Front speaker (L) 2 Front speaker (R) 3 Center speaker 6 7 4 Surround speaker (L) 5 Surround speaker (R) 6 Surround back speaker (L) 7 Surround back speaker (R) 0.3 m (1 ft) or more E Presence speaker (L) R Presence speaker (R) 9 Subwoofer En 134 Glossary Audio information DTS-ES ■ Audio decoding format DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. Dolby Digital DTS Express Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital EX DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Neo:6 Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. Dolby Pro Logic II MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. En 135 HDMI and video information Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. WAV Deep Color Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. HDCP HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI). ■ Others HDMI A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel x.v.Color This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. Network information SSID SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. En 136 Yamaha technologies Supported devices and file formats CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) ■ Supported devices Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. ❑ Bluetooth device • The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP. • A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible, depending on the model. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. ❑ USB devices Compressed Music Enhancer • The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. SILENT CINEMA • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. ❑ iPod Made for. Virtual CINEMA FRONT Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. (as of April 2015) iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of April 2015) En 137 ■ File formats ❑ USB/PC (NAS) Sampling frequency (kHz) Quantization bitrate (bit) Bitrate The number of channels Gapless playback WAV * 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/176.4/ 192 16/24 — 2 ✔ MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — File WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — FLAC 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/176.4/ 192 16/24 — 2 ✔ ALAC 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔ AIFF 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/176.4/ 192 16/24 — 2 ✔ DSD 2.8 MHz/ 5.6 MHz 1 — 2 — * Linear PCM format only • To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. En 138 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. HDMI out Video device The unit TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y VIDEO VIDEO in VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO m 480i/576i m m m m m COMPONENT VIDEO PR COMPONENT VIDEO in VIDEO in 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 480i/ 576i m m 480p/576p m 720p m 1080i VIDEO 480i/ 576i m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO in VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO out m 480i/576i m m m m m m m: Available En 139 (Example) Information on HDMI HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.25) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.27). For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. Operations available from the TV’s remote control • Standby synchronization • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. • Volume control including mute 1 2 • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. b Press ON SCREEN. (Example) ON SCREEN OPTION HDMI Control HDMI Control ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Playback device also turns off RETURN The unit turns off (standby) DISPLAY c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.54) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device operation keys En 140 d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. Audio Return Channel (ARC) ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. 1 2 e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. – “ARC” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.27). Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. • “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.54), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. 5 6 7 Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. En 141 HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. En 142 Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. This receiver supports network connections. Google Noto Fonts For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. Android™ Google Play™ Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is under license. Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK) Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. En 143 Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Explanations regarding GPL This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website (http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/). Specifications Input jacks Output jacks Other jacks • Analog Audio • Analog Audio • YPAO MIC x 1 [TSR-7790] [TSR-7790] Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2) - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, • REMOTE IN x 1 [HTR-6068] SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*1, EXTRA SP L/R*2) • REMOTE OUT x 1 Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2) *1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK, • TRIGGER OUT x 1 • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4) Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3) • Video Composite x 4 (AV 3–6) Component x 2 (AV 1–2) • HDMI Input HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX) • Other USB x 1 (USB2.0) NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] HDMI *2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE] • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC - Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD SURROUND BACK L/R) • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) - ZONE2 OUT x 1 - VGA - Headphone x 1 - 480i/60 Hz [HTR-6068] - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R , EXTRA SP L/R ) - 576p/50 Hz *1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK, - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz *1 *2 - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] *2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE] - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) - ZONE2 OUT x 1 - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - Headphone x 1 - Dolby TrueHD - Dolby Digital Plus • Video MONITOR OUT - Dolby Digital - Component x 1 - DTS-HD Master Audio - Composite x 1 - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - DTS Express • HDMI Output - DTS [TSR-7790] HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2) [HTR-6068] - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible HDMI OUT x 1 (HDMI 1–3: HDCP 2.2 compatible) • Link Function: CEC supported En 144 TUNER Compatible Decoding Formats • Analog Tuner • Decoding Format [TSR-7790] [U.K. and Europe models] - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX [Other models] - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) USB • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Supported Profile................................................ A2DP, AVRCP Surround Back L/R..................................................... 130 W/ch Front L/R..................................................................... 125 W/ch - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, • Bluetooth Version................................................. Ver. 2.1+EDR Center ....................................................................... 130 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) • Post Decoding Format Bluetooth • Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device Front L/R..................................................................... 130 W/ch [HTR-6068] - DTS Digital Surround - Dolby Pro Logic Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Surround L/R .............................................................. 130 W/ch DTS Express • Current Supply Capacity: 1 A • Sink Function • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) Center ....................................................................... 125 W/ch Dolby Pro Logic II Game Surround L/R .............................................................. 125 W/ch Surround Back L/R..................................................... 125 W/ch - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................... 150 W/ch • Maximum Effective Output Power (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 /8 ) Audio Section [TSR-7790] • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) Front L/R..................................................................... 160 W/ch • Supported Codec..................................................... SBC, AAC [TSR-7790] Center ........................................................................ 160 W/ch • Wireless Output ............................................ Bluetooth Class 2 (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) Surround L/R .............................................................. 160 W/ch Front L/R ................................................................. 95 W+95 W Surround Back L/R..................................................... 160 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) [HTR-6068] Network Front L/R ............................................................. 110 W+110 W Front L/R..................................................................... 150 W/ch • PC Client Function Center..............................................................................110 W Center ........................................................................ 150 W/ch Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W Surround L/R .............................................................. 150 W/ch • Maximum Communication Distance....................... 10 m (33 ft) • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W • AirPlay supported [HTR-6068] Surround Back L/R..................................................... 150 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) • Internet Radio (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) [TSR-7790] • WiFi function Front L/R ................................................................. 90 W+90 W Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) .................................. 130/170/195/240 W - Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) [HTR-6068] - Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection [U.S.A. model] Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) .................................. 125/165/190/235 W and USB connection Front L/R ............................................................. 105 W+105 W - Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device Center..............................................................................105 W - Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Surround L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W Mode Surround Back L/R ............................................. 105 W+105 W - Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz • Damping Factor Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 .............................100 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ............................. 200 mV/47 k • Maximum Input Signal - Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On)............................ 2.3 V En 145 • Output Level / Output Impedance [TSR-7790] Video Section • Power Consumption • Video Signal Type........................................NTSC/PAL/SECAM PRE OUT...................................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ [HTR-6068] SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Impedance ...................................... 16 Ω or more • Frequency Response AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ......................... +0/-3 dB [Other models] ................................................................ 300 W • Video Signal Level Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Pb/Pr................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω Network Standby Off........................................................ 1.3 W • Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................ 50 dB or more HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, • Monitor Out Frequency Response Component............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB FM Section (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ...............................0.06% or less • Tuning Range ..........................................................................110 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R (Speaker Out)......................................150 µV or less • Channel Separation AV 5 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................. 70 dB/50 dB or more • Volume Control [Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono ............................................................................... 65 dB Stereo .............................................................................. 64 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono .................................................................................0.5% Stereo ................................................................................0.6% Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB • Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced Bass Boost/Cut ............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz Bass Turnover................................................................ 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) Bluetooth Standby Off Wired ............................................................................. 2.4 W Wireless (Wi-Fi) ............................................................. 2.4 W Wireless Direct .............................................................. 2.5 W HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, [U.S.A. model]..................................... 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz Range ............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB • Tone Control Characteristics ......................................................................................... 0.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), • Video Maximum Input Level ...........................1.5 Vp-p or more AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct) AV 5 etc. (Pure Direct) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out) • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off Component • Total Harmonic Distortion • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) [U.S.A. model]................................................................. 400 W AM section Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On ......................................................................................... 2.3 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ......................................................................................... 3.1 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) [TSR-7790] ....435 x 171 x 379 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-7/8”) [HTR-6068]....435 x 171 x 378 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-7/8”) * Including legs and protrusions • Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright) [TSR-7790] ....435 x 234 x 379 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 14-7/8”) [HTR-6068]....435 x 234 x 378 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 14-7/8”) • Tuning Range [U.S.A. model]......................................... 530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz • Weight [TSR-7790] .................................................... 10.6 kg (23.4 lbs) [HTR-6068].................................................... 10.0 kg (22.1 lbs) General • Power Supply H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back) ...... 12 dB/oct. [U.S.A. model].................................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. [Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz En 146 * Specifications are subject to change without notice. Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 117 E 120, 124 ECO 117 Error indication (front display) External power amplifier 33 Extra Bass 94 Numerics 2.1-channel system 2ch Stereo 57 4K Ultra HD 142 5.1-channel system 7.1-channel system 7ch Stereo 57 Network Standby 20 O 133 H Adaptive DRC 93 ADVANCED SETUP 121 AirPlay 80 AM radio 61 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 141 Audio Decoder (front display information) Auto Power Standby 117 Auto Preset (FM radio) 65 HDCP 27, 129, 136 HDMI output selection 53 HDMI signal compatibility 142 B Banana plug 22 Bluetooth 66 Bookmark 79 L Lipsync 136 M C CINEMA DSP 56 Compressed Music Enhancer 60 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) Initial Volume 109, 115 Input (front display information) Input Trim 94 Internet radio 77 iPod content playback 67 36 D Decoder Off (front display information) 91 Dialogue 93, 119 Dimmer (Front Display) 116 DLNA 73 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 97 DSP Program (front display information) 91 MAC Address Filter 113 Max Volume 109, 115 Memory Guard 117 Menu language selection 35 Multiple room playback 82 MUTE 53, 85 N NAS content playback 74 Network Connection 112 Network information 120 Network Name 114 En 147 62 R Radio Data System tuning Remote control 14 Remote ID 121 Rename 96, 99, 114 Repeat 69, 72, 76 I 91 92 Parametric EQ 107 Party mode 86 Power Amp Assign 105 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) Pure Direct 60 Firmware update 123, 124 FM radio 61 Frequency step setting 61, 122 Front display information 91 A Option menu P F 19 18, 21, 22 113 63 S 91 SCENE function 54 Setup menu 102 Short Message 116 Shortcut (Registering favorite items) Shuffle 69, 72, 76 Signal information 119 Sleep timer 14 Sound program 56, 57 Speaker impedance 17 Standby Through 112 Straight decode 59 Subwoofer Trim 94 Surround decoder 59 T Test Tone 108 Tone Control 93 Trigger function 33 87 U USB storage device content playback 70 V Video/audio input jack combination 28 Virtual CINEMA FRONT 58 Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 109 W Wallpaper 116 Web control 88 Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) Wireless (Wi-Fi) 45, 112 Wireless Direct 51, 112 WPS 47 112 Y YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO Volume 93 36 Z Zone2 82, 115 En 148 © 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH003C0/EN2-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
Yamaha HTR-6068 de handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
- Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha HTR-6068 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha HTR-6068 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha HTR-6068 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha HTR-6068 Le manuel du propriétaire
- Deutsch: Yamaha HTR-6068 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha HTR-6068 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha HTR-6068 Omistajan opas
- svenska: Yamaha HTR-6068 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha HTR-6068 El kitabı
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha RX-V779 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A1050 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A820 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A1040 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V673 de handleiding
-
Yamaha Aventage RX-A2040 de handleiding
-
Yamaha HTR-4065 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V675 de handleiding
-
-
